JP2017086501A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of performing a display suggesting a direction of a first game area via an image display device to promote a shooting of game balls toward the first game area, in a suitable situation.SOLUTION: The game machine of the present invention makes a notification promoting a shooting of game balls toward a first game area, when a menu screen of an empty-player state is being displayed and a passing of a game ball through a winning gate positioned in a second game area is detected; when the menu screen of an empty-player state is not being displayed a passing of a game ball through the winning gate is detected, makes a notification promoting a shooting of game balls toward the first game area; and when a second game state is finished, makes a notification promoting a shooting of game balls toward the first game area.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 119

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In conventional gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines, in order to urge the player to launch a game ball toward a gaming area (first gaming area) that is advantageous to the player in the normal gaming state, There may be a display on the provided image display device suggesting the direction of the game area (first game area) in which the player is advantageous.

  In such a gaming machine, when it is in a normal gaming state, a gaming ball is used when it is in a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state (short-time gaming state, probability variation gaming state, jackpot gaming state) Display indicating the direction of the game area (first game area) that is advantageous to the player via the image display device when the flow of the game ball is detected in another game area to be fired (second game area) There is a thing which performs (refer patent document 1).

JP 2014-208132 A

  However, there is a problem that it is unclear whether or not the display indicating the direction of the game area is performed via the image display device under any situation waiting for the customer.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of performing display suggesting the direction of a gaming area via an image display device under an appropriate situation. Objective.

  In order to solve the above-described problems, the present invention provides a game having a first game area and a second game area in which game balls can flow down, game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and notifying means for notifying information. In the machine, the game control means controls the progress of the game according to a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the notifying means does not advance the game. A menu screen display control means for controlling to display a menu screen on which a method for setting the gaming machine is displayed when a predetermined display condition is satisfied in the waiting state for the customer, and the end of the second gaming state And a specific notification control means for causing the notification means to execute a specific notification for notifying the launch of a game ball to the first game area, wherein the specific notification control means includes the menu in the customer waiting state. When a predetermined execution condition is satisfied while the screen is displayed, the notification means is caused to execute a specific notification that notifies the launch of the game ball to the first game area, while the menu screen is not displayed in the customer waiting state. When the predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the specific notification is executed by the notification means.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to notify a player that a game ball should be launched toward the first game area under an appropriate situation.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a fragmentary perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A-1) is a diagram representing a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, (a-2) is a diagram representing a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, and (b) is a diagram representing a reach determination table. . (A) is a figure showing the special symbol determination table for jackpot winning, (b) is a figure showing the special symbol determination table for losers. (A) is a figure showing a big hit game control table, (b) is a figure showing a big winning game big prize opening / closing control table, and (c) is a figure showing a short hit game big prize opening / closing control table. (A) is a figure showing a game condition data determination table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in a non-time-short game state. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in a time-short game state. (A) is a diagram showing a normal symbol hit determination table, (b) is a diagram showing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a diagram showing a general variation pattern determination table, (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination The figure showing a table, (e) is a figure showing an auxiliary | assistant game control table, (f) is a figure showing a 2nd starting port opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol reserve storage area of the main RAM, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reserve storage area, (c) is the normal symbol reserve storage area of the main RAM The figure showing a structure is a figure showing the structure of each memory | storage part of a normal symbol holding | maintenance storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure normal power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol memory | storage determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the auxiliary | assistant game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the command analysis process in an effect control board. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the command analysis processing of FIG. 34. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a start opening prize in an effect control board. (A) is a figure showing the structure of the production | presentation information storage area | region of sub RAM102c, (b) is a figure showing the structure of each memory | storage part of an production | presentation information storage area. It is a figure showing an example of a continuous notice production | presentation determination table. It is a figure showing the modification of a continuous notice effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch zone effect mode determination process in an effect control board. It is a figure showing an example of a prefetch zone production scenario judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of the last number determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a zone precursor effect scenario determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for prefetch zone production execution. (A) is a flowchart which shows the continuous step-up notice effect aspect determination process in an effect control board, (b) is a flowchart which shows the chance eye notice effect aspect determination process in an effect control board. (A) is a figure showing an example of a continuous step-up notice effect scenario determination table, (b) is a figure showing an example of a chance eye notice effect scenario determination table. (A) is a flowchart which shows the serif notice effect mode determination process in an effect control board, (b) is a flowchart which shows the effect notice effect mode determination process in an effect control board. (A) is a figure showing an example of a serif notice effect scenario determination table, (b) is a figure showing an example of an effect notice effect scenario determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the icon change notice determination process in an effect control board. It is a figure showing an example of the icon change notice determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the icon final display mode determination table for the normal change notice / throwing kiss notice in the normal gaming state. It is a figure showing an example of the icon last display mode judgment table for the normal change notice in a time-short game state. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for the normal change notice in a normal gaming state. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for the throwing kiss notice in a normal gaming state. It is a figure showing an example of the icon final display mode determination table for handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing an example of the dialog count determination table for handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake meeting notice. It is a figure explaining the normal mode which is a display mode of an icon, the 1st special mode, and the 2nd special mode 11-15, 21-23. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special modes 11-15, 21-25, 31-35 which are the display modes of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special modes 41-45, 51-55, and 61-65 which are the display modes of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 4th special modes 11-15, 21-24, 31, 41 which are the display modes of an icon. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding information update process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process in a production control board. It is a figure showing an example of a production mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process in an effect control board. (A) is a figure showing an example of the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for chance eye notice, (b) is a figure showing an example of the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for zone turning effect, (c) is for normal use It is a figure showing an example of the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (for effect mode A). It is a flowchart which shows the change effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a figure showing an example of the change effect pattern determination table for the time of non-execution of a zone precursor effect and a prefetch zone effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect pattern determination table for execution of the zone-rolling failure effect 1; (b) is a diagram showing an example of a variation effect pattern determination table for execution of the zone-rolling failure effect 2; (C) is a figure showing an example of the change production pattern judgment table for the time of execution of a zone turn success production. It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table for execution of prefetch zone production. It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table for production mode B (high probability gaming state and short time gaming state). It is a figure showing an example of the variation production pattern determination table for production mode C (low probability gaming state and short time gaming state). It is a flowchart which shows the certain effect determination process in an effect control board. (A) is a figure showing an example of the certain effect production pattern determination table 1, (b) is a figure showing an example of the certain effect production pattern determination table 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch zone effect execution determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the icon change notification execution determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-read zone effect end determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows a customer waiting display control process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the right-handed display control process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the left-handed display control process in an effect control board. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the image display apparatus in various game states. It is a figure showing the production flow of handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing a mode before handshake meeting notice occurs. (A) is a figure showing a state in which the hold icon subject to the handshake meeting notice is displayed in the third special mode 11, and (b) is the hold icon displayed before the hold icon subject to the handshake meeting notice. (C) is a diagram showing the appearance of the handshake meeting venue related to the handshake meeting notice, (d) is a handshake character and escort relating to the handshake meeting notice. It is a figure showing a mode that the character appeared. It is a figure showing a mode that the hold icon used as the object of handshake meeting notice is waiting. It is a figure showing a mode that the hold icon used as the object of handshake meeting notice is waiting. It is a figure showing a mode that the handshake meeting notice is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the handshake meeting notice is performed. (A) is a figure showing a state immediately before the handshake meeting notice ends, and (b) and (c) are figures showing a state after the handshake meeting notice is finished. It is a figure showing the production flow of a throwing kiss notice. It is a figure showing a mode that a hold icon changes from the normal mode to the 2nd special mode. (A) is a diagram showing the state before the throwing kiss notice is performed, (b) is a diagram showing the appearance of the character related to the throwing kiss notice, and (c) is the character relating to the throwing kiss notice targeting the heart. It is a figure showing a mode that it flew toward the icon. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a heart hits an icon subject to a throwing kiss notice, and (b) is a state in which the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss notice and the change is being notified. FIG. 9C is a diagram illustrating a state after the throwing kiss notice ends. (A) is a diagram showing the state before the throwing kiss notice is performed, (b) is a diagram showing the appearance of the character related to the throwing kiss notice, and (c) is the character relating to the throwing kiss notice targeting the heart. It is a figure showing a mode that it flew toward the icon. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a heart hits an icon subject to a throwing kiss notice, and (b) is a state in which the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss notice and the change is being notified. FIG. 9C is a diagram illustrating a state after the throwing kiss notice ends. (A-1) is a time chart for explaining the zone-flowing effect and the pre-reading zone effect production flow (when the zone-making effect is executed with a 4-second variation effect), and (a-2) is the zone turning effect and the look-ahead. A time chart for explaining the zone production effect flow (when the zone production effect is executed with a variation effect of 8 seconds), (b-1) is a display mode of the effect pattern in the zone production success production (4 seconds of variation production) (B-2) is a time chart for explaining an example of the display pattern of the effect pattern in zone failure failure production 1 (zone change failure production 1 is a variation effect of 4 seconds). (C-1) is the relationship between the special symbol stop and the change in the display mode of the icon (a zone-successful production effect is performed with a 4-second variation effect) (C-2) explains the relationship between the stop of the special symbol and the change of the display mode of the icon (when the zone turning failure effect 1 is executed with a variation effect of 4 seconds). It is a time chart for. (A) And (b) is a figure showing a state before the zone precursor effect is executed, and (c) and (d) are states in which the zone indicator effect is executed according to the third special mode 41 of the icon display mode. FIG. (A) And (b) is a figure showing a mode that the zone display effect by the display mode of an icon by the 3rd special mode 4 is performed, (c) is the 3rd special mode 5 and the 3rd special mode of the icon display mode. It is a figure showing a mode that the zone precursor effect by the aspect 2 (prefetch zone effect indication aspect) is performed. (A) is a figure showing a state in which the pre-reading symbols constituting the zone turning effect are temporarily stopped while the zone display effect is executed in accordance with the third special mode 2 (pre-read zone effect suggesting mode). In (b), the zone indication effect is executed according to the third special aspect 2 (pre-read zone effect suggestion mode) of the icon display mode, and the pre-read symbol and the zone symbol constituting the zone turn effect are temporarily stopped. A diagram showing the state, (c) is a pre-sign symbol, zone symbol, and rush that make up the zone-striking effect while the zone sign effect is executed in the third special mode 2 (pre-read zone effect suggestion mode). It is a figure showing a mode that the design is temporarily stopped. (A) The zone display effect is executed in the third special mode 2 (pre-read zone effect suggestion mode), and the pre-read symbol, zone symbol, and inrush symbol constituting the zone turn effect are stopped. FIGS. 5B and 5C show the state in which the icon is displayed in the third special mode 3 (the pre-read zone notification effect mode) and the pre-reading zone indicates that the zone is in the pre-read zone. It is a figure showing a mode that the zone background image is displayed. It is a figure showing a mode that the pre-reading zone background image which shows that it is a prefetching zone is displayed while the zone alerting | reporting effect by the 3rd special mode 3 (prefetching zone effect alerting | reporting aspect) is performed as the display mode of an icon. . (A) is a figure showing a state in which a zone notification effect is displayed in the third special mode 3 (prefetch zone effect notification mode), and (b) is a jackpot winning notification in the icon display mode. It is a figure showing a mode that it is. It is a figure showing a mode that the continuous step-up notice effect is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that SP reach production is performed after continuous step-up notice production is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the chance eye notice effect is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that a serif notice production is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that the effect notice effect is performed. It is a time chart in the case where an accurate effect is performed during a variation effect and a pseudo-accurate light emission effect is performed with the start of a normal demonstration effect. It is a figure showing the example of an effect before a certain effect is performed in a change effect. It is a figure showing the example of an effect in case a certain effect is performed in a change effect. It is a figure showing the example of an effect in the case where a pseudo-accurate light emission effect is performed with the start of the customer waiting demonstration display. It is a time chart in the case where a pseudo-accurate effect is performed from the middle of execution of a customer waiting demonstration display. It is a figure showing the example of an effect in the case of performing a pseudo-accurate light emission effect from the middle of execution of a customer waiting demonstration display. It is a figure which shows the example of a right-handed display when a game ball | bowl enters a 1st starting port in the high-probability time short game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the left-handed display at the time of changing from a probability change game state to a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when a game ball passes a winning gate in the customer waiting state in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when a game ball passes a winning gate during the production | presentation symbol fluctuation | variation in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when a game ball passes a winning gate during the menu screen display in the customer waiting state in a normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows a 1st modification about the example of a display when a game ball passes a winning gate during the production | presentation symbol fluctuation of a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the example of a display when a game ball passes a winning gate during the production | presentation symbol fluctuation of a normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the right-handed display control process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the left-handed display control processing in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the left-handed display control processing in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the relationship between control of the passing of the game ball to the winning gate and the left-handed display in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the right-handed display control process in 5th Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
The first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y is formed with a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A in which gaming balls flow down. And a game board 2.

  The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facility of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via a hinge mechanism portion H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door around the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the game area 2A and the front portion of the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 covers the front portion of the game area 2A so as to be visible with glass (transparent member) attached from the back side to a window provided in the center.

  A lock mechanism R that fixes the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided on the other end side of the glass door Y2. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y <b> 2 is provided with a receiving tray 50 that stores a plurality of game balls and a firing operation device 3 that can perform an operation for firing the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a launch device 4 (see FIG. 3) capable of launching a game ball toward the game area 2A. The launcher 4 is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the tray 50 are supplied to the launching device 4.

  The firing operation device 3 includes a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2, a launch handle 32 rotatably provided on the base 31, a handle illumination device 33 (light handle) for causing the launch handle 32 to emit light in a predetermined manner. Light emitting part). The launching device 4 launches a game ball with a strength (hereinafter referred to as “game ball launch strength”) according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32.

  The handle illuminating device 33 (handle light emitting unit) is formed in a dome shape that constitutes a front portion of the launch handle 32 and bulges forward, and a plurality of handle illumination devices 33 (handle light emitting portions) are formed in an internal space defined by a lens member that can transmit light. Light emitting elements (full color LED, lamp, etc.) are disposed. When the LED / lamp emits light, it is possible to execute a light emission effect (such as an accurate light emission effect or a pseudo-accurate light emission effect to be described later) that causes the firing handle 32 to emit light in a predetermined manner. In addition, a blower opening 34 b serving as a blowout opening for wind (air) sent out from a blower 34 described later is provided at the front end of the handle lighting device 33.

  A blower 34 for sending wind (air) through the inside of the base 31 of the launch operation device 3 and the blower port 34b is provided at a position corresponding to the launch operation device 3 on the back side of the glass door Y2. ing. By operating a blower motor 34a provided in the blower 34, a blowing effect (such as a certain effect to be described later) that sends wind (air) in a predetermined manner toward the hand of a player who operates the firing handle 32 is executed. It is possible to do.

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a special winning opening 8, which will be described later, are arranged and a game ball is placed. A guide member 29 </ b> D having a guide path that can be guided toward the second start port 7 formed on the upper surface is provided.

  The decorative frame 29 </ b> A is fitted into the approximate center of the game board 2. An image display device 14 composed of a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. Further, an effect accessory device 17 is provided at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A.

  The inner rail member 29B is disposed outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is disposed outside the inner rail member 29B. A game ball fired with a predetermined game ball launch strength rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. In the game area 2A, a plurality of nails and windmills are provided. A game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and windmills.

  The left region 2AL of the game region 2A is provided with first to third general winning ports 11-1, 11-2, 11-3. In the right area 2AR of the game area 2A, a fourth general winning opening 11-4 is provided. The 1st to 4th general winning opening 11-1, 11-2, 11-3, 11-4 have the 1st to 4th general winning opening detecting sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, 11 respectively. -4a (see FIG. 3) is provided, and when the first to fourth general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, 11-4a detect a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) Pieces) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (game value is given).

Further, a winning gate 10 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the right area 2AR of the game area 2A. For this reason, the game ball flowing down the right area 2AR is likely to pass through the winning gate 10. The winning gate 10 is provided with a winning gate detection sensor 10a for detecting a game ball. On the condition that the winning gate detection sensor 10a detects a game ball, a normal symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute an auxiliary game advantageous to the player. Details of the normal symbol lottery will be described later.
Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the game ball flowing down the right region 2AR is likely to pass through the winning gate 10 but is difficult to flow down toward the first starting port 6. .

  Below the image display device 14 below the left area 2AL of the game area 2A, there is provided a first start port 6 that is invariable and can always enter the ball. For this reason, the game ball flowing down the left region 2AL can easily enter the first start port 6. The first start port 6 is provided with a first start port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. A first special symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player on condition that the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball. Details of the first special symbol lottery will be described later. When the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as award balls (a game value is given).

  A variable second start port 7 is provided immediately below the first start port 6. The second start port 7 is controlled by the second start port control device 70 to either a basic mode (closed mode) incapable of winning a prize or a special mode (open mode) of winning. The second start port 7 is also provided with a second start port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player on condition that the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball. Details of the second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as award balls (a game value is given).

  The second start port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  The normal movable piece 70A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the movable piece 70A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the second start port 7 is opened. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a basic mode of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal movable piece 70A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the second start port 7. The second start port 7 is controlled to a special mode that allows the ball to enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the second starting port 7 is opened, the normal movable piece 70A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

  The predetermined condition for the second start-up port control device 70 is that it is determined that the auxiliary game is executed in the normal symbol lottery based on the passing of the game ball in the winning gate 10 described above. For this reason, the opening of the second start port 7 by the rotation of the normal movable piece 70A is performed when the game ball flows down the right area 2AR where the game ball easily passes through the winning gate 10. That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball flows down the right region 2AR, so that the ball entering the second start port 7 is easily performed.

  A variable large winning opening 8 is provided on the downstream side of the winning gate 10 in the right area 2AR. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the right side area 2AR are likely to enter the big winning opening 8. The special winning opening 8 is controlled by the special winning opening control device 80 to either a basic mode in which no winning is possible or a special mode in which a winning is possible. The big winning opening 8 is provided with a big winning opening detecting sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the special winning opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball (a game value is given).

  The special prize opening control device 80 includes a rotatable special movable piece 80A and a special prize opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a drive unit for rotating the special movable piece 80A.

  The special movable piece 80A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the special movable piece 80A is stopped in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the special winning opening 8 is played. The ball is closed so that it cannot enter. The closing of the special prize opening 8 by the special movable piece 80 </ b> A constitutes the basic mode of the special prize opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the grand prize winning opening 8 so that the game ball can enter. Opening of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the special winning opening 8. When the special winning piece 80A is opened, the special movable piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the special winning opening 8.

  The predetermined condition for the special winning opening control device 80 is the above-described first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as “special symbol lottery”). ”), It is determined that a special game (a jackpot game) is executed.

  On the surface of the game board 2 and below the game area 2A, a symbol display device comprising a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21 and a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold A hold display device including a display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the second special symbol display device 21 is This is a variable display device that displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 7.

  The first special symbol lottery is a jackpot determination as to whether or not the jackpot is won based on the special chart determination information acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting port 6, or the result of the jackpot determination Based on this, it means performing a special symbol determination for determining the type of special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. In addition, the second special symbol lottery refers to determining whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the special symbol determination information acquired based on the game ball entering the second starting port 7, or displaying the second special symbol display This means that the type of special symbol displayed on the device 21 is determined. That is, it can be said that each special symbol lottery is a lottery for determining (determining) whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol for notifying the result of the first special symbol lottery after a predetermined time has elapsed. Stop display is performed. When the second special symbol lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 21 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol for notifying the result of the second special symbol lottery after a predetermined time has elapsed. The symbol is stopped and displayed.

  For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each include a plurality of LEDs arranged in a line. In the variation display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21 moves and blinks at a predetermined interval. In the special symbol stop display, a specific LED indicating the result of each special symbol lottery lights up.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays the result of the normal symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes through the winning gate 10. The normal symbol lottery is a normal symbol display device that determines whether or not the player has been won based on the common symbol determination information acquired based on the passing of the game ball to the winning gate 10, or based on the result of the hit determination. The normal symbol judgment which judges the kind of normal symbol displayed on 22 is performed. That is, the normal symbol lottery can be said to be a lottery for determining (determining) whether or not to execute an auxiliary game advantageous to the player.

  When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol display device 22 displays the variation of the normal symbol, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the normal symbol stop display for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery is performed.

  For example, each of the normal symbol display devices 22 includes a plurality of LEDs. In the normal symbol variation display, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. And in the stop display of a normal symbol, specific LED showing the result of a normal symbol lottery lights.

  By the way, even if a game ball enters the start openings 6 and 7 during the special symbol variation display or during the jackpot game (special game) in which the special winning opening control device 80 operates, the special symbol variation display is immediately performed. It is not done and the result of the special symbol lottery is not notified. That is, the special symbol variation display may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a fixed condition, an upper limit is set for the number of special symbols that can be suspended. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to “4” for each of the start ports 6 and 7. That is, it is possible to hold up to four rights to execute the special symbol variation display for each of the start ports 6 and 7.

  The first special symbol hold display device 23 displays the hold number (U1: hereinafter referred to as “first special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first special figure change display”). To do. The second special symbol hold display device 24 displays the hold number (U2: hereinafter referred to as “second special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “second special figure change display”). To do. The first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 include, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and turn on a predetermined LED according to the number of holds.

  Similarly, for the variable symbol display (hereinafter referred to as “general variable display”), the upper limit reserved number is set to four, and the reserved number (G: hereinafter referred to as “general map reserved number”). ) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. The normal symbol hold display device 25 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of hold of the normal symbols.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device includes an image display device 14, an audio output device 15 (speaker), an effect lighting device 16 (effect light emitting unit), an effect accessory device 17, an effect button device 18, and a handle illumination device. 33 (handle light emission part) and the air blower 34 are comprised. An image display device 14 and an effect accessory device 17 are provided on the game board 2, and an audio output device 15, an effect illumination device 16, an effect button device 18, a handle illumination device 33, and a blower device 34 are provided on the glass door Y2. ing.

  The image display device 14 displays effects by displaying images by displaying various still images and moving images (movies) as the game progresses. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14, but other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

  The audio output device 15 (speaker) produces a sound effect by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. The effect lighting device 16 includes a game board lighting device provided in the game board 2 and a glass door lighting device provided in the glass door Y2, and the irradiation direction of the light of each lamp and LED provided in each lighting device. And lighting effects by changing the emission color. The effect accessory device 17 includes a movable part 17A and a solenoid or a motor for operating the movable part 17A, and operates the movable part 17A to produce an effect by operation.

  The saucer 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 and a selection button device 19 that function as input devices for performing operations related to various effects described later.

  The effect button device 18 has an operable effect button 18A, an effect button detection switch 18a for detecting an operation on the effect button 18A, and an effect button 18A that protrudes upward from the normal position (normal state) and the normal position. An effect button drive motor 18b for moving (changing) to a position (protruding state) is provided (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Also provided are a plurality of light emitting elements (full color LEDs, lamps, etc.) for causing the effect button 18A to emit light in a predetermined manner.

  The selection button device 19 includes an operable selection button 19A and a selection button detection switch 19a for detecting an operation on the selection button 19A (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Further, a light emitting element (full color LED, lamp, etc.) for causing the selection button 19A to emit light in a predetermined manner is also provided.

  The selection button 19A includes an upper button 191A, a left button 192A, a lower button 193A, and a right button 194A. Each button 191 </ b> A to 194 </ b> A is provided so as to be pressed in a state of protruding from the tray 50.

  The effect device performs various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As an effect, for example, there is a fluctuating effect (special drawing lottery effect) performed in the image display device 14 based on the results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The variation effect (special drawing lottery effect) is performed with a variation display of the effect symbol and a stop display of the effect symbol.

  The variation display of the effect symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol varies for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner. The stop display of the effect symbol is performed corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “effect symbol display” when the change display and stop display of the effect symbol are collectively referred to). In the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The effect symbols are, for example, three rows of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 (for example, numbers from “1” to “9”) arranged in the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. Effect symbols) and three rows of special effect symbols TZ4 (effect symbols representing numbers from “1” to “9”) arranged in the end region of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. In the variation display of the effect symbols, the effect symbols in each column move from the top to the bottom (variable display) as if the reels are rotating. In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the effect symbol is not limited to this, and may be an aspect of moving from right to left or rotating on the spot. In addition, during the variation display of the effect symbols, various effect images such as background images and object images such as characters, movies, and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the stop display of the effect symbols, in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display unit 140 such as the image display device 14, the stop symbols are displayed after the above-mentioned three rows of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are temporarily stopped. Then, the special effect symbols TZ4 in the three rows are stopped and displayed (mainly stopped) in accordance with the stop display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the end side region. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on a predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display unit 140) when the effect symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the stop display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is notified by the stop display of the special effect symbol TZ4.

  The result of the special symbol lottery is not notified by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on the effective line, but the special symbol lottery is determined by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 on the effective line. The result may be notified. Further, the special effect symbol TZ4 is not displayed on the image display device 14 (variable display and stop display) but is displayed (variable display and stop display) on a dedicated display unit (LED display or the like). Alternatively, the special effect symbols TZ4 may be eliminated and only the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3.

  In the staging device, in addition to the fluctuating effects (special drawing lottery effects), special (big hit) game effects that are performed when the jackpot game is executed, and special symbol fluctuation display or special (big hit) games are performed for a predetermined period. Various effects such as a customer waiting effect (demonstration display) performed in an internal standby state (so-called customer waiting state) that is not performed are performed.

  On the back of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2, there are a main control board 101 for performing various controls relating to the game, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game An information output terminal board 108 is provided.

(Internal configuration of gaming machine Y)
Next, the internal configuration of the gaming machine Y will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply board 107 generates a main power supply (operation power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and the main power supply is used for the gaming machine Y (the main control board 101, the effect control board 102, To the payout control board 103, the lamp control board 104, the image control board 105, and various electronic components). In addition, the power supply voltage supplied from the outside is monitored, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, it is detected that a power interruption (power failure) has occurred, and a low-level power interruption detection signal is sent to the main control board 101. Output.

  The power supply board 107 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor that is stored by supplying power from the outside, and can supply the backup power supply to the main control board 101 even when the power supply is cut off (power failure). Note that backup power may be supplied to the effect control board 102 and the payout control board 103. Further, the backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and for example, a battery may be used, or a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

  The main control board 101 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (quartz crystal units) and the like, performs arithmetic processing related to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, a first starting port detection sensor 6a, a second starting port detection sensor 7a, a big winning port detection sensor 8a, and a winning gate detection sensor 10a are connected via an input port (not shown). And the 1st-4th general prize opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, 11-4a are connected. Each detection sensor outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101 when detecting a game ball.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, via an output port (not shown), a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the normal movable piece 70A of the second start port control device 70, and a prize winning port control. A special prize opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B and the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B.

  Further, on the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold are provided via an output port (not shown). A display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a normal symbol hold display device 25 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs a display control signal for controlling each display device to each display device 20-25.

  Furthermore, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information relating to a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the predetermined game information (external signal).

  The effect control board 102 comprehensively controls the progress of the effect (effect operation). The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is connected to the main control board 101 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing related to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

  An effect button detection switch 18 a and a selection button detection switch 19 a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button 18A is operated, the effect button detection switch 18a relays the lamp control board 104 and outputs an effect button detection signal indicating that the operation button 18A has been operated to the effect control board 102. In other words, the lamp control board 104 serves as a relay board that relays the effect button detection signal.

  When the selection button 19A is operated, the selection button detection switch 19a relays the lamp control board 104 and outputs a selection button detection signal indicating that the selection button 19A has been operated to the effect control board 102. In other words, the lamp control board 104 serves as a relay board that relays the selection button detection signal.

  The selection button detection switch 19a is connected to the upper button 191A to detect the operation of the upper button 191A, and the left button detection switch 192a is connected to the left button 192A to detect the operation of the left button 192A. The lower button 193A is connected to the lower button 193A to detect the operation of the lower button 193A, and the right button detection switch 194a is connected to the right button 194A to detect the operation of the right button 194A.

  When each button detection switch 191a, 192a, 193a, 194a detects an operation, the upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are respectively transmitted via the lamp control board 104. To the effect control board 102. The upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are collectively referred to as a “selection button detection signal”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation (operation) input from the player is detected by the effect button detection switch 18a and the selection button detection switch 19a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An infrared sensor (motion sensor) for detecting an operation such as holding the hand, a touch panel for detecting a predetermined operation of the player, etc., may be provided with a detection element capable of detecting an input such as the operation or operation of the player. Good.

  The sub CPU 102a outputs a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button detection signal output from the effect button device 18, a selection button detection signal output from the selection button device 19, and an input signal from a timer (crystal oscillator). Based on the above, the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and a command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 based on the processing. The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 102a performs arithmetic processing.

  The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching a game ball from the launch device 4 and payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c. The payout control board 103 is connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

  On the input side of the payout control board 103, a touch sensor 32a and a firing volume knob 32b are connected. The touch sensor 32 a is attached in the firing handle 32 of the firing operation device 3. When a player, a store clerk, or the like touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32 a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32 and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the launch control board 106. The firing volume knob 32 b is connected to the firing handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 and detects the rotation angle.

  A firing solenoid 41 of the launching device 4 is connected to the output side of the payout control board 103 via a power supply board 107. The payout control board 103 permits energization of the firing solenoid 41 when receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a.

  When the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the firing volume knob 32 b is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. In this manner, the payout control board 103 controls the energization of the launch solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the launch handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the launch volume knob 32b, and launches the game ball.

  In the present embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 106. Since one game ball is fired every time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  Further, on the output side of the payout control board 103, a payout device 5 for paying out a game ball supplied from a storage tank (not shown) provided on the upper back of the game board mounting frame Y1 to the receiving tray 50 (player). The payout drive unit 51 is connected. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout device 5 to give a predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, an effect lighting device 16, an effect accessory device 17, a handle illumination device 33, and a blower device 34 are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104a is based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”), the lighting device 16 for effect, the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17, and the effect button device. 18. Performs light emission control of light emitting elements (full color LED, lamp, etc.) provided in the selection button device 19 and the handle lighting device 33. In addition, the lamp CPU 104a is a solenoid or motor for operating the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 based on the effect control command, an effect button drive motor 18b for operating the effect button 18A of the effect button device 18, And drive control of the ventilation motor 34a etc. for sending out wind from the air blower 34 is performed.

  The lamp control board 104 is connected to the effect button detection switch 18a of the effect button device 18 and the selection button detection switch 19a of the selection button device 19, and the effect control board 102, the effect button device 18 and the selection button device 19 are connected. The effect button detection signal and the selection button detection signal are relayed between the two.

  The image control board 105 generates at least a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14. A sound generation unit 105C that generates a sound signal related to the sound to be output to the sound output unit 15 and outputs the sound signal to the sound output device 15, and a control unit 105A that controls and controls the image generation unit 105B and the sound generation unit 105C.

  The overall unit 105A of the image control board 105 includes an overall CPU 105Aa, an overall ROM 105Ab, and an overall RAM 105Ac for performing image display control by the image display device 14.

  The overall CPU 105Aa is connected to an overall ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the overall CPU 105Aa is read out. Upon receiving a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the general CPU 105Aa issues an instruction for an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 on the image generation unit 105B based on the command, and also transmits to the sound generation unit 105C. A voice instruction to be output from the voice output device 15 is issued.

  The general RAM 105Ac functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the general CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the general ROM 105Ab.

  The general ROM 105Ab is composed of a mask ROM, and displays a control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list including drawing control command groups, and an animation of a production pattern. Anime patterns, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. Various information such as a duty ratio that is a parameter of the luminance of the image display device 14 is included.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP 105Ba (Video Display Processor) that is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb that stores image data, a VRAM 105Bc that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data, and the like. ing.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to the CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data as a source of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on an instruction from the overall CPU 105Aa. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, a material image representing an individual image such as a background image such as a scene, a character, and a dialogue that constitutes the background of the effect symbol image or the effect symbol. It is data. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image.

  Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without being compressed. The CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba divides the pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14, and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 4A-1 and FIG. 4A-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of a jackpot determination table for performing a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination constitutes the above-described special symbol lottery, and is to determine whether or not a “hit” is won for executing a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 4A-1 is a table (hereinafter referred to as a “first jackpot determination table”) referred to in the first jackpot determination performed based on the game ball entering the first start port 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4A-2 is a table (hereinafter referred to as a “second jackpot determination table”) referred to in the second jackpot determination performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 7. is there.

  In any jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as “low probability jackpot determination table”) referred to when the jackpot winning probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value). And a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as “high probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value).

  In each jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number acquired based on the game ball entering the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the jackpot determination table, “big hit” or “lost” Is determined (determined).

  If the result of the jackpot determination is “hit”, after a special symbol (special result) indicating the result is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game (special game) with opening of the jackpot 8 is executed, and the prize ball is more than usual. It will be in a state where it is easy to acquire. That is, a game value is given to the player.

  When the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the reach determination is further performed based on the reach determination table of FIG. In the reach determination table, the reach determination value and the presence / absence of execution of reach production are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the reach effect is executed in the variation effect by collating the reach determination random number acquired based on the game ball entering the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the reach determination table. It is determined (determined) whether or not to do so.

  When the reach determination result is “with reach” for executing the reach effect, the reach effect for increasing the player's expectation of winning the big hit is performed in the variable effect (special drawing lottery effect). In the present embodiment, the probability of being determined as “reach” in the reach determination table used in the reach determination executed based on the game ball entering the first starting port 6 is the first described later. Although it is not divided according to the number of special figure holds, the probability of determining “there is reach” is divided according to the number of first special figure hold, and may be different depending on the number of first figure hold. For example, the probability that the reach determination table used when the first special figure hold number is a first value (for example, the first special figure hold number = 0 to 1) is determined to be “with reach” is the first special figure hold number. The figure holding number is set to be higher than the probability that the reach determination table used when the second value is larger than the first value (for example, the first special figure holding number ≧ 2) is determined to have “reach”. Can do.

  Similarly, the probability that the reach determination table used in the reach determination executed based on the game ball entering the second start port 7 is determined to have “reach” is the second special figure hold described later. Although not divided according to the number, the probability that the “reach” is determined is divided according to the second special figure reservation number, and may be different depending on the second special figure reservation number. For example, the probability that the reach determination table used when the second special figure hold number is a third value (for example, the second special figure hold number = 0 to 1) is determined to be “with reach” is the second special figure hold number. The figure hold number is set to be higher than the probability of being determined as “reach” in the reach determination table used when the fourth value is larger than the third value (for example, the second special figure hold number ≧ 2). Can do.

  As the reach effect, for example, effect symbols (for example, the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol) in two areas of the left area, the central area, and the right area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 during the variable display of the effect symbols. If the symbol TZ3) is temporarily stopped and a predetermined effect symbol stops on a predetermined effective line in the remaining one region, a state where an effect symbol array representing a big win is obtained (a so-called “reach state”) is obtained. Reach production is mentioned. In addition to this, there is a full-rotation reach effect in which the same type of effect symbols are arranged in the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 in a variable manner.

  After reaching a reach state in the reach production, a specific effect (which will be expected to change the special symbol's change display to a special result) is increased ("SP reach production" or "SPSP reach production" described later)) May or may not be done on an evolutionary basis. Further, in the reach production, the reach state does not always occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a specific effect is performed to increase a player's expectation of winning a big hit without reaching a reach state. In the present embodiment, a reach effect is performed if the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”. However, it is also possible to perform reach determination even in the case of a big win, and perform a reach effect only when the reach determination determines “reach is present”.

(Special symbol judgment table)
Fig.5 (a)-FIG.5 (b) are figures which show an example of the special symbol determination table for performing special symbol determination. The special symbol determination constitutes the above-described special symbol lottery, and determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20, 21 based on the result of the jackpot determination (a special symbol stop display mode). It is to be.

  The special symbol determination table is roughly divided according to the result of the jackpot determination (a jackpot or a loss). That is, FIG. 5A shows a special symbol determination table for jackpot winning that is referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 5B shows that the result of the jackpot determination is “ It is a special symbol determination table for losing referred to in the special symbol determination in the case of “losing”.

  Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of start opening (the first start opening 6 or the second start opening 7) in which a game ball was entered as a trigger for the special symbol determination. When the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the special symbol determination table is further divided according to whether or not the reach effect is executed (reach determination result).

  In each special symbol determination table, the special symbol determination value and the type (determination result) of the special symbol to be stopped are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special symbol determining random number acquired based on the game ball entering the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 is collated with the special symbol determining table, and the special symbol that is stopped is displayed. The type of symbol is determined (determined). As information indicating the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, special symbol stop symbol data and effect symbol designation command are set.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in the process on the main control board 101, and the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the process on the effect control board 102. The effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the special symbol variation display, and is used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

  The effect symbol designation command is a 1-byte MODE data for identifying a special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. And 1-byte DATA data for identifying the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  As for the effect designating command, if the MODE data is “E3H”, it means that the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E4H”, the second special symbol is displayed. This means that special symbol stop display is performed on the symbol display device 21. The effect designating command with MODE data “E3H” is referred to as “first effect designating command”, and the effect designating command with MODE data “E4H” is referred to as “second effect designating command”.

(Big hit game control table)
FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of a jackpot game control table used when controlling a jackpot game.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the jackpot game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the jackpot game until the first opening of the big prize opening 8, and the opening to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening Ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the jackpot game, and the ending An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are related to the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

(Big prize opening / closing control table)
FIG. 6B to FIG. 6C are diagrams showing an example of the big prize opening / closing control table used when controlling the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8 in the big hit game. FIG. 6B is a long winning game opening / closing control table for a long hit game that is referred to in the long hit game that constitutes the jackpot game, and FIG. This is a prize winning opening / closing control table.

  The big winning opening / closing control table for the big hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 in the big win game. As conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8, a special number is a round number (R) which is the number of the round game, and an opening number of the big prize opening 8 (operation of the big prize opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time / closing time (operation time / non-operation time) of the special winning opening 8 are set.

(Game condition data judgment table)
FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of a game condition data determination table for determining (determining) game condition data to be newly set after the end of the jackpot game. The game condition data determination table is divided according to the state of the winning probability of winning the jackpot (low probability game state / high probability game state), and in each divided table, the type of special symbol (special diagram stop symbol data) and game Condition data is uniquely associated and stored. The game condition data includes the number of special symbols that can be executed according to the status of the jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning status, the status of the ease of winning the start opening, and the state of the gaming conditions (Xa, Ja: 3) “00H” to “02H” are set.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a game condition determination table for determining game conditions from the game condition data. The gaming condition determination table includes gaming condition data, ON / OFF of flags (high probability flag and short time flag) indicating the state of each gaming condition, and the number of special symbol variable display that can be executed according to the state of the gaming condition (Xa , Ja: (hereinafter referred to as “executable number of times”) is uniquely associated and stored. The number of times that the special symbol variable display can be executed can be said to be the number of times of special symbol lottery.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8 to FIG. 9 are diagrams showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when determining a variation display mode of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation pattern”). The special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the time required for the special symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation time”) and the production type of the fluctuation production (special drawing lottery production) according to the special symbol fluctuation display. ing. Although the details of the variation effect will be described later, it is an effect that is performed until the end of the variable symbol display of the special symbol as the start of the variable symbol variation display. In addition to the variable display of symbols, an image effect by an image display device 14 such as an object image such as a character or a predetermined movie image, a sound effect by an audio output device 15, an illumination effect by an effect lighting device 16, and an operation effect by a movable portion 17A. Consists of.

  The special symbol variation pattern includes a first special symbol variation pattern which is a variation display mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 and a first special symbol variation pattern which is displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. It is distinguished from the second special figure variation pattern which is a mode of variation display of two special symbols.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special figure variation pattern in a non-short-time gaming state, which will be described later, and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation | variation pattern determination table referred when determining a special figure fluctuation | variation pattern in (including high-precision time short). That is, the special figure variation pattern determination table is largely divided according to the gaming state.

  In addition, the special figure variation pattern determination table includes special symbol stop symbol data that can specify the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (the type of start port relating to the variation display) and the special symbol determination result, and the number of special symbol reservations ( Divided by U1 or U2).

  In each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of special figure fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special figure variation pattern determination random number acquired based on the game ball entering the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 is collated with the special diagram variation pattern determination table. A figure variation pattern is determined.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated with a predetermined probability set in advance in each table. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation pattern includes the expectation level of a big win and a specific big win (for example, a promising big win, a long win, etc.). Expectations are associated with each other.

  The special figure variation pattern is formally determined by the special figure variation pattern determination (step S313-3) at the time of starting the variation display of the special symbol (at the time of the special symbol memory determination processing in step S310). 6 and 7 (when the input control process in step S200) is entered, it is provisionally determined by the first pre-determination process (step S237) or the second pre-determination process (step S247).

  A start opening prize designation command and a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The start opening winning designation command corresponds to a special figure variation pattern determined by a first pre-determination or a second pre-determination described later, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination. The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after execution of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination.

  The special symbol variation pattern designation command is 1 byte for identifying the special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) on which the special symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination is performed. MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special figure variation pattern. For the special figure variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “E6H”, this means that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is “E7H”, 2 Indicates that special symbols are displayed on the special symbol display device 21 in a variable manner.

  Note that the special map fluctuation pattern designation command with MODE data “E6H” is “first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command”, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command with MODE data “E7H” is “second special figure”. This is called “variation pattern designation command”.

  The start opening winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the start opening and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern.

  Regarding the start opening prize designation command, if the MODE data is “E1H”, it indicates that a game ball has entered the first start opening 6, and if the MODE data is “E2H”, the second start opening 7 is displayed. Indicates that a game ball has entered. It should be noted that the start opening prize designation command with MODE data “E1H” is “first start opening prize designation command”, and the start opening prize designation command with MODE data “E2H” is “second start opening prize designation command”. "

  In addition, in the rightmost column of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the effect type (rough classification) of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is described as a reference.

  Here, the effect type of the change effect related to the special figure change pattern described in the column of the effect type in FIGS. 8 and 9 will be described.

  The “normal fluctuation” described in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 is a normal fluctuation effect that does not involve reach, and is a fluctuation effect that makes it difficult for a player to have the expectation of a big win. “Abbreviated variation” is a variation effect that has a variation time shorter than a normal variation and does not involve reach, and is a variation effect that makes it difficult for a player to have the expectation of a big win. The “super shortened variation” is a variation effect that has a shorter variation time than the shortened variation and does not involve reach, and is a variation effect that makes it difficult for a player to have a big win expectation.

  “Reach” means that a part of the combination of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped, and the other jackpots and special effect symbols TZ4 fluctuate and the player expects a big hit It means the variation mode to have. For example, when the combination of the three-digit effect symbol “777” is set as the combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 for notifying the jackpot, the two effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop). ), And the remaining effect symbol TZ2 and special effect symbol TZ4 are changing.

  “Temporary stop” means that the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are shaken small, or the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are deformed to a small extent, so that the player feels that the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped. And is sometimes called a pseudo stop. Also, the special effect symbol TZ4 is displayed in a synchronized manner (synchronized) with the start of the special symbol variation display, and is displayed in a synchronized manner (synchronized) with the special symbol stop display. Although it does not temporarily stop like ~ TZ3, you may make it perform the display synchronized with the fluctuation display of the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the fluctuation stop (including temporary stop).

  The “normal reach” described in FIGS. 8 and 9 means that two effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the remaining one effect symbol TZ2 in the central area. Is a reach effect with a low expectation of winning a big hit (special game is executed) in which the special effect symbol TZ4 fluctuates in the end region.

  In the present embodiment, “normal reach” is not selected as the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the big win, but “normal reach” is selected as the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the big win. You can also

  The “SP reach” described in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 is a super reach production with a higher expectation of winning a big hit (special game is executed) than normal reach. For example, the effect symbol TZ2 in the central area that is not temporarily stopped may change specially, or a special effect image, a movie, or the like may be displayed.

  The “SPSP reach” described in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 is a special reach effect with a higher expectation of winning a big win (special game is executed) than super reach. For example, it is executed after super reach, or a special effect image or movie or the like different from super reach is displayed.

  Although not described in the column of the effect type in FIGS. 8 and 9, in this embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed in any variation effect. “Pseudo-continuous effect” means that a special effect of temporarily changing the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and then changing the effect once or a plurality of times is executed during the special symbol change display corresponding to one special symbol lottery. This means a notice effect by a variation mode (simulating a plurality of variation displays). For the special effect symbol TZ4, the special effect is not performed even during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the variable display is continued until the change of the special symbol is stopped.

  As a first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table in the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table in the short-time gaming state shown in FIG. 9 is that the rate at which the ultra-short variation is selected and determined increases as the number of special figure reservations increases.
As a second feature, a super shortening variation (2 seconds) having a variation time shorter than the shortening variation (4 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.
A third feature is that a normal variation (6 seconds) having a shorter variation time than the normal variation (8 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.
A fourth feature is that a long fluctuation (10 seconds) having a shorter fluctuation time than the long fluctuation (13.5 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.

  FIG. 10A to FIG. 10F show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol-based game based on winning to the winning gate 10.

(Winning judgment table)
FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of a hit determination table for performing a hit determination. The hit determination is to determine (determine) whether or not to execute an auxiliary game advantageous to the player with the opening of the second start port 7.

  The hit determination table is divided according to the start opening winning easiness. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table referred to in the non-time-saving gaming state and a hit determination table referred to in the time-saving gaming state.

  In each hit determination table, a hit determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, either “winning” or “losing” is determined by collating a winning determination random number acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 with a winning determination table. If “winning” is won, an auxiliary game with the opening of the second starting port 7 is executed after a normal symbol (specific result) indicating the result is stopped, and a game ball enters the second starting port 7 than usual. It is easy to ball and it is easy to win a prize ball. That is, a game value is given to the player.

(Normal symbol judgment table)
FIG.10 (b) is a figure which shows an example of the normal symbol determination table for performing normal symbol determination. The normal symbol determination is to determine (determine) the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The normal symbol determination table is divided according to the hit determination result (win and miss).

  Each normal symbol determination table stores a normal symbol determination value and a normal symbol that is stopped and displayed in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, by comparing the normal symbol determination random number acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 with the normal symbol determination table, the type of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined. As information indicating the type of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, general symbol stop symbol data and a normal effect symbol designation command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the process on the main control board 101, and the normal effect designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the normal symbol variation display, and used in the process on the effect control board 102.

(Normal map variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 10C determines a variation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation pattern”) associated with a time required to display the variation of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation time”). It is a figure which shows the common figure fluctuation pattern determination table for this. The normal variation pattern determination table is composed of a general variation variation determination table that is referred to in the non-short game state and a general variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the short time gaming state.

  In each table, the normal pattern variation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of general map variation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the type of the general variation pattern is determined by collating the random number for determining the normal variation pattern acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 with the normal variation pattern determination table. .

(Auxiliary game reference data determination table)
FIG. 10D is a diagram illustrating an example of an auxiliary game reference data determination table used when controlling the auxiliary game. This table stores data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing an auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 10 (d), in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current start port winning easiness and the normal stop symbol data is associated with the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data includes information regarding the start opening winning easiness state and the result of the normal symbol determination when the normal symbol determination is performed.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 10E is a diagram illustrating an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game. This table stores conditions for controlling the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the auxiliary game, an opening time, which is a period from when the auxiliary game is started to when the second opening 7 is first opened, and transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control opening / closing of the second starting port 7, ending time, which is a period from the end of the last opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, And the ending designation | designated command transmitted to the production | presentation control board 102 at the time of ending start is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with auxiliary game reference data.

(Second start opening / closing control table)
FIG. 10F is a diagram showing an example of a second start port opening / closing control table for auxiliary games used when controlling opening / closing of the second start port 7. Conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start port 7 during the auxiliary game are stored in the second start port opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, a general electric operation number (D) which is an opening number (operation of the second starting port control device 70) number of the second starting port 7 in the auxiliary game, 2 Opening time and closing time (operation time / non-operation time) of the start port 7 are set.

(Explanation of special game types)
In the present embodiment, a “big hit game” that is executed when “big hit” is won as a special game that is advantageous to the player, with the opening of the big prize opening 8 (operation of the big prize control device 80). Is provided. The jackpot game is divided into a “long hit game” and a “short hit game” mainly depending on the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8. For this reason, during the “big hit game”, it is advantageous for the player to make the game ball flow down toward the big winning opening 8 in the right region 2AR.

  In the jackpot game, a round game involving one or more opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times that the special winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of opening) and the total time that can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are set in advance. The reason that “can be opened” is that the number of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, 9). Therefore, even if the grand prize winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times of opening, the big winning prize opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the special winning opening 8 is closed and the round game may end. It should be noted that the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 8 in each round game may or may not be unified for each jackpot game.

(Description of game conditions)
Next, game conditions that are conditions when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning easiness are set as the game conditions. As for the jackpot winning probability, the game progresses under the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, and the game ball progresses under the short-time gaming state or the non-short-time gaming state with respect to the ease of winning the game opening. To do. The initial (power-on) gaming conditions are set to a low probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, and this low probability gaming state and a non-time-short gaming state are referred to as a normal gaming state. In addition, the low probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state are referred to as a low-probability time-short gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state are referred to as a high-probability time-short gaming state (probability varying gaming state).
Here, in the “normal game state”, in order to execute the first special symbol lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 6, it is directed to the left region 2AL where it is easy to enter the first start port 6. It is a favorable condition for the player to let the game ball flow down.

  In the present embodiment, the low-probability gaming state with respect to the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set relatively disadvantageous to the player as 1 / 299.3. On the other hand, the high probability gaming state is that the jackpot winning probability is higher than that of the low probability gaming state, that is, set to 1/40 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in a high probability gaming state, winning a jackpot is easier than in the low probability gaming state, and the number of winning jackpots per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous to the player. It can be said that it is a state.

  The non-time-saving gaming state is a state in which the start opening winning easiness is normal. Specifically, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the normal time variation time is set to 15 seconds, and the operation time (second start time) of the second start port control device 70 that operates when “winning” is won in the winning determination. The sum of the opening time of the mouth 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning in the hit determination for the normal symbol is set to 1/50. The “total opening time” is because the second start port 7 may be opened a plurality of times for each hit. Since the number of game balls that can be won per game is limited, when the number of game balls wins, the ball is closed without waiting for the opening time or the number of times of opening.

On the other hand, the short-time gaming state (low / high probability) means that the opening time of the second start port 7 (operation time of the second start port control device 70) per unit time is shorter than that in the non-short-time game state. The game state is long and the second start port 7 is likely to be in an open state. There is a percentage that the variation time shorter than the non-short game state is selected due to the relatively high start opening winning ease and the relatively short variation time of the special figure variation pattern set in the variation pattern determination table. The number of times that the second special symbol determination can be executed per unit time increases. Therefore, under the same jackpot winning probability, the number of times the second special symbol determination is executed per unit time inevitably increases the number of winning jackpots per unit time. Low accuracy / high accuracy) can be said to be an advantageous state for the player as compared to the non-short game state.
In other words, in the short-time gaming state (low / high probability), the game ball can flow down toward the winning gate 10 in the right region 2AR and the second start port 7 located at the tip of the right region 2AR. This is a favorable condition for the person.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the short-time gaming state, the normal variation time is set to 3.0 seconds, the total maximum opening time of the second start port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, The probability of winning is set to 49/50. That is, all the components of the start opening winning ease are set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving gaming state. In the short-time gaming state, the second start port 7 is opened twice via a 1.5 second closure (interval), but it may be opened only once without the closure. Moreover, closure may be set several times.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the start openings 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player fires the game ball by operating the appropriate launch handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the short-time gaming state, since it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 than in the non-short-time gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the short-time game state is set to be more advantageous for the player than the non-short-time game state.

  In this way, by winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot game (long win game / short win game) and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (low probability game state / high probability game state and non-time short game state / In combination with the short-time gaming state). In view of this, the substantial jackpot type (the jackpot type based on the profits enjoyed by the player) includes the type of jackpot game to be executed and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game ends ( It can be said that it is a combination with (gaming state). Therefore, hereinafter, apart from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, based on the combination of the type of jackpot game derived by the jackpot and the game conditions after the jackpot game, that is, based on the type of profit that the player enjoys The jackpot type can be classified.

  The jackpot that is set to 50 high-probability gaming states and 100 time-short gaming states is set to “high-probability long-time short-and-long (1)”, and the jackpot winning The long hit game is executed, and then the high hit rate is set to 50 high probability game states and 80 short time game states are set to “high probability middle hour short and long hits (probability variable big hit 2)”, and the short win game is executed by winning. The jackpot that is subsequently set to 50 high-probability gaming states and 60 time-short gaming states is referred to as “high-probability short-time short / short (probable variation jackpot 3)”.

  When the jackpot is won, the normal game state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the low probability game state and the non-short-time game state are entered.

(Control processing of main control board)
Next, control processing executed by the main CPU 101a in the main control board 101 will be described.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads the activation program from the main ROM 101b in response to power-on, determines whether a RAM clear switch (not shown) provided on the main control board 101 is ON, and clears the RAM. When the switch is turned on, a process for initializing each storage area of the main RAM 101c is performed. When the RAM clear switch is not turned on, the control state is restored (returned) before the power is turned off (power failure). To perform the process.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure fluctuation random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates an initial value random number including an initial value random number for jackpot determination, an initial value random number for special symbol determination, an initial value random number for hit determination, and the like. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The following timer interrupt processing is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a to the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special game variable counter update process, a special symbol stop time update process, an opening time update process, an open / close time update process for the special winning opening 8, and the like. And the time control process which updates the auxiliary | assistant game timer counter which performs the update process of the change time of a normal symbol, the update process of the stop time of a normal symbol, the update process of the opening / closing time of the 2nd start port 7, etc. is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number composed of a jackpot determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, a hit determination random number, and a normal symbol determination random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process for updating the jackpot determining initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the winning determination initial value random number.

  For updating various random numbers, the random number is updated by adding “1” to a random number counter provided for each type of random number. Various random numbers have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. In the update of the random number, when the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”, and the random number indicated by the random number counter is set once after being rounded. When the round initial value is reached, the initial random number at that time is set as a new round initial value, and each random number is newly updated.

  In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs input control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a new valid signal is transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a performs the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the special prize opening control device 80. Special symbol special electric control processing (special symbol related processing) for performing the above control (control of the special symbol system device). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a performs a normal signal normal power control process (normal signal control) for controlling the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second starting port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Perform symbolic processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a has a start port (first start port 6, second start port 7), a big winning port 8, and first to fourth general winning ports 11-1, 11-2, 11-3, It is checked whether or not the prize ball counter corresponding to 11-4 exceeds “0”. If the prize ball counter exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is displayed. Transmit to the payout control board 103. When a prize ball signal is transmitted, an update process for subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a, external signal output control data for outputting information related to the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B, and the big prize opening / closing solenoid Drive control data for driving 80B (start opening / closing solenoid drive data and big prize opening / closing solenoid drive data), and predetermined symbols on the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25 Data creation processing of display control data (special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data) for display is performed.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs output control processing. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Subsequently, in order to light each LED of the symbol display devices 20, 21, and 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, and 25, display device output processing for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. . Finally, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a has input a detection signal from any of the first to fourth general prize opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, and 11-4a, that is, a game ball. Determines whether or not a player has entered a ball in any of the first to fourth general winning openings 11-1, 11-2, 11-3, 11-4. When the main CPU 101a does not input a detection signal from the first to fourth general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, and 11-4a, the process proceeds to step S220. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from any of the first to fourth general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, and 11-4a, a general winning used for a winning ball is used. A predetermined data is added to the mouth ball counter and updated.

  In step S210, the main CPU 101a detects a first general winning opening entry command from the second general winning opening detection sensor 11-2a when a detection signal is input from the first general winning opening detection sensor 11-1a. When a signal is input, a second general winning opening entrance designation command is issued. When a detection signal is input from the third general winning opening detection sensor 11-3a, a third general winning entry entrance designation command is output. When a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11-4a, a process for setting the fourth general winning opening entering command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c is performed.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 8a has been inputted, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening 8. When the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S230. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to the special winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball and updates it, and wins the big winning opening 8. The counter value of the large winning opening prescribed winning counter (C) for counting the played game balls is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 6 (starting region). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 7 (starting region). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the winning gate 10 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(First control port detection signal input process of main control board)
Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the first start port detection signal input process is terminated. If there is a valid detection signal, the start port prize ball counter for paying out a prize ball is incremented by “1” in step S232. And a first start port winning process for turning on the first start port winning flag in the first start port winning flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter for counting the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not less than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the first start port detection signal input process, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the step In S234, the counter value of the first special figure reservation number counter is incremented by "1" and updated.

  In step S234, the main CPU 101a updates the first special symbol hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 23 in order to update the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c. Set to area. In step S235, the main CPU 101a sets a first special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. Thereby, the production control board 102 is notified of the first special figure reservation number (U1).

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a determines the jackpot determination random number indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number indicated by the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number indicated by the reach determination random number counter, and the special figure variation pattern. The random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the random number counter for determination is acquired and stored in the first special symbol storage area. Hereinafter, the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number are collectively referred to as “special pattern determination information”.

  The first special symbol storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11A), and the special figure determination information is a number in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. Are stored in order from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit has an area for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

  In step S237, the main CPU 101a performs a first preliminary determination process based on a game ball entering the first start port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination process will be described.

  Specifically, in the first pre-determination process, the stop symbol data of the first special symbol and the first special symbol variation pattern are determined based on the special symbol determination information acquired in step S236. That is, the main CPU 101a performs the first special symbol as a first pre-determination process before performing a jackpot determination process (step S311), a special symbol determination process (step S312), and a special figure variation pattern determination process (step S313), which will be described later. The stop symbol data and the first special symbol variation pattern are determined.

  In step S238, the main CPU 101a transmits the stop symbol data of the first special symbol determined in the first pre-determination process and the first start opening winning designation command corresponding to the first special symbol variation pattern for the production in the main RAM 101c. The data is set in the data storage area (transmission buffer), and the first start port detection signal input process is terminated.

(Second control port detection signal input process of main control board)
Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the second start port detection signal input process. If it determines that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S242.

  In step S242, the main CPU 101a updates the start opening prize ball counter for paying out the winning balls by adding “1”, updates the second start opening prize specifying counter by adding “1”, and updates the main opening prize winning counter. A second start port winning process for turning on the second start port winning flag in the second start port winning flag storage area of the RAM 101c is performed. The second start opening prize prescribed counter counts the number of wins to the second start opening 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the second starting port 7 for a single auxiliary game is limited.

  In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol reservation number counter for counting the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the second start port detection signal input process, and if it determines that the second special figure holding number (U2) is smaller than 4, the step The processing is moved to S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special figure pending number counter and updates it. Further, in step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 24 in step S244 to display the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c. Set to a predetermined area. In step S245, the main CPU 101a sets a second special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. Thereby, the second special figure reservation number (U2) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S246, the main CPU 101a determines the jackpot determination random number indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number indicated by the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number indicated by the reach determination random number counter, and the special figure variation pattern. The random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination (special figure determination information) indicated by the random number counter for determination is acquired and stored in the second special symbol storage area.

  The second special symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11A), and the special figure determination information is a number in a storage unit in which no random number is stored. Are stored in order from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit has an area for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

  And main CPU101a performs the 2nd prior determination process based on the entrance into the 2nd starting port 7 in step S247. Here, the second prior determination process will be described.

  Specifically, in the second pre-determination process, the stop symbol data of the second special symbol and the second special symbol variation pattern are determined based on the special symbol determination information acquired in step S246. That is, the main CPU 101a stops the second special symbol as a second pre-determination process before performing the jackpot determination process (step S311), the special symbol determination process (step S312), and the special figure variation pattern determination process (step S313). The data and the second special figure variation pattern are determined.

  Then, in step S248, the main CPU 101a transmits the stop symbol data of the second special symbol determined in the second pre-determination process and the second start opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation pattern to the effect transmission of the main RAM 101c. This is set in the data storage area (transmission buffer), and the second start port detection signal input process is terminated.

(Main control board winning gate detection signal input processing)
Next, winning gate detection signal input processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether there is a valid detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the main winning gate detection signal input process. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S252.

  In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal symbol holding number counter for counting the number of normal symbol holdings (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main winning gate detection signal input process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S253.

  In step S253, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (G) of the general-purpose pending number counter and updates it. In step S253, the main CPU 101a updates the normal symbol hold number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25 in the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to update the normal symbol hold number (G). set. Further, in step S254, the main CPU 101a sets a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved symbols (G) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the drawing reservation number (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S255, the main CPU 101a determines a hit determination random number indicated by the hit determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number indicated by the normal symbol determination random number counter, and a normal pattern variation pattern determination random number indicated by the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number counter. Is stored in the normal symbol storage area, and the process proceeds to step S256. In step S256, the main CPU 101a sets a winning gate passage designation command corresponding to the passing (winning) of the game ball to the winning gate 10 in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c, and detects the main winning gate. The signal input process is terminated. Hereinafter, the hit determination random number, the normal symbol determination random number, and the common pattern variation pattern determination random number are collectively referred to as “normal pattern determination information”.

  The normal symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11C), and the common symbol determination information is a memory having a small number in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. It is memorized in order from the part. Each storage unit has an area for each stored random number (see FIG. 11D).

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
Next, the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special electricity processing data is loaded, and the branch destination address is referred to from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special electric treatment data = 0, the special symbol memory determination process (step S310). ), The process moves to the special symbol variation process (step S320) if the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, and the special symbol stop process (step S330) if the special symbol special electric treatment data = 2. If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process is transferred to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric process data = 4, the process is transferred to the big hit game end process (step S350). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is in progress, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step 310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure holding number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move processing.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter by subtracting “1”, and in step S310-6, corresponds to the second special figure hold number (U2) after the subtraction. The special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S310-7, the main CPU 101a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the second special symbol holding storage area. The special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage region. Also, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol common storage area (the zeroth storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is deleted. Thereby, the special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted. Further, the special figure stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S310-5.

  In step S310-5, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol reservation number counter by subtracting “1”, and in step S310-6, corresponds to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. A special symbol memory designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S310-7, the main CPU 101a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the first special symbol holding storage area. The special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage region. Also, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (the zero storage unit) and stored in the zero storage unit. The figure determination information is deleted. Thereby, the special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted. Further, the special figure stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  In addition, in order to update the 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or the 2nd special figure reservation number (U2) with the shift process of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, specifically, the data In order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the start port according to the above, first and second special symbol hold display data are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the special symbol hold number (U1 or U2).

  In the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special symbol reserved storage area is given priority over the first special symbol reserved storage area (the second special figure reserved number is set as the first special figure reserved number). The first special symbol reserved memory area or the second special symbol reserved memory area is shifted in the order in which the game balls enter the starting opening (the first special figure reserved number). And the second special symbol reservation number may be digested in the order of winning), and the first special symbol reservation storage area is given priority over the second special symbol reservation storage area (the first special figure reservation number is the second). It may be given priority over the number of special figure reservations.

  If it is determined in step S310-4 that the first special figure hold number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to steps S319-1 to S319-3 to set a customer waiting state. Wait state setting processing is performed. The waiting state for a customer means a state in which a special symbol variation display and a special game (a jackpot game) are not executed, but includes that a normal symbol variation display and an auxiliary game are not executed. May be.

  As the customer waiting state setting process, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area in step S319-1. When the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process, and determines the customer waiting state determination in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. If the flag “01H” is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the customer waiting state determination flag “01H” in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area because the customer waiting state is not repeatedly set.

In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets a customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol memory determination process. As a result, the effect control board 102 is notified that the customer is waiting.
Here, the customer waiting state designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area is displayed with the special symbol variation display as described in step S310-1, step S310-2 and step S310-4. And when there is no hold number of the first special figure hold number (U1) and the second special figure hold number (U2), it is executed by the main CPU 101a.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes a jackpot determination process based on the data shifted in step S310-8 and newly stored in the zeroth storage unit.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the current special symbol fluctuation display is a first special symbol fluctuation display based on the subtraction of the first special figure reservation number (U1).

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that the display is a variation display of the first special symbol, in step S311-2, the main CPU 101a selects the first special symbol jackpot determination table. On the other hand, when determining that the main CPU 101a is not the first start port 6 (the second start port 7) in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a selects the second special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-3.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the current jackpot winning probability is a high-probability gaming state.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects “from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3”. The “first high probability jackpot determination table” or the “second high probability jackpot determination table” is selected.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the “first low probability” is further selected from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. "Big jackpot determination table" or "Second low probability jackpot determination table" is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number in the 0th storage unit after being shifted in step S310-6 to the “high probability jackpot selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6”. It is checked against “determination table” or “low-probability jackpot determination table” to determine whether it is “big jackpot” or “losing”, and this jackpot determination process is terminated.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process. Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 101a determines in step S312-1 whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “winning winning”. If it is determined that the game is a “hit winning”, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for the jackpot winning in step S312-4. The processing is moved to S312-2.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a performs reach determination. Specifically, the reach determination random number value shifted in step S310-8 and stored in the 0th storage unit is collated with the reach determination table.

  In step S <b> 312-3, the main CPU 101 a determines whether or not “reach” is determined as a result of the reach determination in step S <b> 312-2. If it is determined that “reach is present”, the process proceeds to step S312-5, and a special symbol determination table for reach loss is selected. On the other hand, if it is not “reach”, that is, it is determined that “no reach”, the process proceeds to step S312-6 to select a special symbol determination table for loss without reach.

  In step S312-7, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the special symbol memory determination process based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7). In step S312-8, one of the special symbol determination table for the first startup port and the special symbol determination table for the second startup port is selected based on the type of the startup port.

  In step S312-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special symbol determination in which the special symbol determination random number value shifted in step S310-8 and stored in the 0th storage unit is checked against the selected special symbol determination table.

  In step S312-10, an effect symbol designation command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-9, and the determined effect symbol designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 101a determines in step S312-1 that stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol stop symbol data") based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-11, that is, the special symbol. The determined special figure stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  As will be described later, the determined special symbol stop symbol data determines “special bonus special symbol” or the like in the special symbol stop pattern of FIG. 24 when determining the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of FIG. At this time, it is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game processing of FIG.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a compares the special figure stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area, and selects a game condition data determination table according to the current status of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the special condition stop symbol data is compared with the selected game condition data determination table to determine the game condition data, and set in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 19 and performs the special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, a special figure fluctuation pattern including information on the special figure fluctuation time and the effect type of the fluctuating effect described later, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination is generated. decide.

(Special map variation pattern judgment process of main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to ON / OFF of a high-probability flag, which will be described later, and ON / OFF of a short-time flag, to determine the current gaming state (high probability gaming state / low probability gaming state, and (Time saving gaming state / non-time saving gaming state) is checked, and a special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state is selected.

  In step S313-2, the main CPU 101a checks the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c, and determines a special figure variation pattern determination table based on the special figure stop symbol data. This is because in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table divided according to the gaming state is further divided by special figure stop symbol data.

  In addition, when the special figure stop symbol data is “19” or “29”, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is losing without reach, the number of special figure suspensions (U1 or The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined based on U2). This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination table related to the reachless loss is also divided according to the special figure reservation number.

  If the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined, the main CPU 101a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination in step S313-3. Specifically, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number is collated with the determined special figure fluctuation pattern determination table to determine a special figure fluctuation pattern.

  When the main CPU 101a determines the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 19, and in step S310-9, the special graphic variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern is transmitted for the effect in the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area.

  As a result, the special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 receives the game state designation command, the production symbol designation command, and the special figure variation pattern designation command, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol. Is determined, and the variation effect pattern associated with the content of the variation effect is determined based on the game state designation command, the effect symbol designation command, and the special figure variation pattern designation command. It should be noted that the effect control board 102 may recognize that the special symbol variation display starts upon reception of the effect symbol designation command and / or the special symbol variation pattern designation command. Further, the gaming state designation command may be transmitted after the transmission of the effect symbol designation command or the special figure variation pattern designation command.

  In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure change time (see FIGS. 8 and 9) associated with the special figure change pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data for the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to perform the special symbol variation display. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be operated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  In step S310-12, the main CPU 101a sets the flag “00H” in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, that is, clears the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, thereby ending the customer waiting state. At 13, the special symbol special electricity processing data = 1 is set, and the special symbol memory determination processing is terminated.

(Special design variation processing of main control board)
Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display ends, in other words, whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S310-10 has elapsed (special game timer). Counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display does not end, the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a produces a special symbol variation stop designation command to notify the rendering control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a displays special figure stop display data based on the special figure stop symbol data set in step S312-11 in order to stop and display the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21. Set. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player. In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the special symbol stop display (hereinafter referred to as "special figure stop time", for example, 0.8 seconds) to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and in step S320-6, turns off the first starting opening prize flag or the second starting opening prize flag, and this special symbol variation process. Exit.

(Special design stop processing for main control board)
The special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the special symbol stop display ends in step S330-1, in other words, the special figure stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed. Determine whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that the special symbol stop display does not end, the special symbol stop processing is terminated, and when it is determined that the special symbol stop display ends, the process proceeds to step S330-2.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the time reduction flag is turned on (set) in the time reduction flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The fact that the hour / hour flag is ON in the hour / hour flag storage area means that the current state is the hour / hour gaming state. If the hour / hour flag is ON in the hour / hour flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the hour / hour flag is OFF in the hour / hour flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a calculates “1” from the counter value of the remaining number counter in the short time gaming state indicating the remaining number of times the special symbol change display according to the short time gaming state (J: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of short time gaming states”). The operation value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "is stored as the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a sets a short time number designation command corresponding to the short time state remaining number of times (J) in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the time-saving gaming state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for displaying the time-short remaining number information (also referred to as remaining time-short number information) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J) = 0. If the remaining time-saving gaming state (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-6. If the remaining time-saving gaming state (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-7.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a turns OFF (clears) the time reduction flag stored in the time reduction flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. It should be noted that the fact that the short time gaming state remaining number (J) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times (Ja) in the short time gaming state. Means to end.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability flag is set (set) in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The fact that the high probability flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area means that the current state is a high probability gaming state. If the high probability flag storage area is turned on, the process proceeds to step S330-8. If the high probability flag storage area is turned off, the process proceeds to step S330-12. Move.

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a displays the counter value of the high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of display of the special symbol variation display due to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of high-probability gaming states”). The operation value (X−1) obtained by subtracting “1” from the value is stored as a new high probability gaming state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a sets a high probability count designation command corresponding to the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) set in the high probability gaming state remaining count counter in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the high probability game state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for displaying the high probability remaining number information (also referred to as remaining probability variation number information) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) = 0. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-11. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S330-12.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a turns off the high probability flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. Note that the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of executable times (Xa) in the high probability gaming state, and the special symbol based on the “high probability” state. This means that the fluctuation display of is finished.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, and sets a game state designation command indicating the game state in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the current gaming state is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is “jackpot”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). To do. Here, if it is not determined to be a special jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-14, and if it is determined to be a special jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-15.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure special electricity processing data to 0, and performs a process for moving the process to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the special figure special electricity processing data, and in step S330-16, the game condition flag storage area (time-short flag storage area and high probability flag storage area), high probability gaming state Reset (clear) the remaining fluctuation counter and the remaining fluctuation counter in the short-time gaming state. That is, the low probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state are controlled.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area as the jackpot game opening process. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(Big hit game processing of main control board)
The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently opening. The term “opening” as used herein refers to a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the current opening is being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that the current opening is not currently performed, the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the main jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, which jackpot is confirmed, a jackpot opening / closing control table corresponding to the jackpot type is selected and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, the long winning game winning prize opening / closing control table or the short winning game winning prize opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in accordance with the special figure stop symbol data. Next, the main CPU 101a stores the value stored in the round game number storage area (by adding “1” to the round number (R). Note that at the time of step S340-3, the round game is performed once. Since it is not executed, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the round game number storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special prize opening process. More specifically, the value stored in the special electricity operation number storage area (“1” is added to the special electricity operation number (K) and stored. Then, the main CPU 101a energizes the special prize opening opening / closing solenoid 80B. The big winning opening / closing solenoid energization start data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to open the big winning opening 8. Here, the main CPU 101a displays the big winning opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3. Referring to the round number (R) and the special electric operation number (K), the opening time of the special winning opening 8 (the operating time of the special winning opening control device 80) is set in the special game timer counter. The game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, a round designation command indicating the current round game number specified by the stored value of the round game number storage area is issued. Set in the production transmission data storage area. This is because information indicating that the round game starts is transmitted to the effect control board 102. For example, at the time of the first release of the first round game per long game, “1” is set in the round game number storage area and “1” is set in the special operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the special operation number storage area, the big hit game process is terminated without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of a round game, the main CPU 101a transmits a round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, an effect display is performed on the image display device 14 such as “ROUND1”.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to the period from the end of all previously set round games (after the final opening of the big winning opening 8 is completed) to the end of the big hit game. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-17, where it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the current ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is performed. Move processing to.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the big prize opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the big prize opening control device 80 is in operation. If the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is being opened, it determines in step S340-8 whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the big prize opening 8 is satisfied. To do. As this “opening end condition”, the counter value of the special winning opening prescribed winning counter has reached a prescribed number (for example, nine) in the round game, or the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0) Is adopted). If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-9. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the big hit game process is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the energization stop data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c in order to close the special winning opening 8, and the opening / closing of the special winning opening determined in step 340-3 is performed. Referring to the control table, based on the current round number (R) and special operation number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the special prize opening prescribed prize counter is a prescribed number ( For example, it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. If it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round has not been completed, the big hit game process is ended.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-7 that the special winning opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-11 whether a preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the main jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-4.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special electric operation number storage area is cleared and the counter value of the special prize opening prescribed winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the jackpot game has ended, that is, whether or not the value stored in the round game number storage area (round number (R) is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game). When determining “Yes”, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S340-15, and when determining “No”, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a updates and stores the current round number (R) stored in the round game count storage area by adding “1”.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game end processing. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, the type of jackpot is confirmed, and an ending designation command associated with the type of jackpot transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S340-18 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that it is not, the jackpot game process is terminated.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 4 to the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the jackpot game end processing shown in FIG.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S350-5. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is ON, in step S350-3, the high probability flag is stored in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. While turning on “01H”, a high probability gaming state setting process is performed in which the executable number (Xa) is set in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a sets a high probability count designation command corresponding to the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) set in the high probability gaming state remaining count counter in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the high probability game state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for displaying the high probability remaining number information (also referred to as remaining probability variation number information) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded game condition data against the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not the time flag is turned on in the time flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S350-8. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is turned ON, the time reduction flag is turned ON in the time reduction flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S350-6. Then, a short time gaming state setting process is performed in which the executable number (Ja) is set in the short time gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S350-7, the main CPU 101a sets a short time number designation command corresponding to the short time state remaining state number (J) set in the short time state remaining state number counter in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the time-saving gaming state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for displaying the time-short remaining number information (also referred to as remaining time-short number information) on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the current game condition status, sets a game status designation command indicating the current game condition status in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S350-9 The special electric processing data is set to 0, and the processing moves to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a command indicating the number of remaining short-time gaming states (J) is transmitted as the time-saving number designation command. However, a command indicating the number of variable displays executed in the time-short gaming state may be used. Further, although a command indicating the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) is transmitted as the high probability number designation command, it may be a command indicating the number of times of variable display executed in the high probability gaming state.

  In addition, the short-time number of times designation command and the high probability number-of-times designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 102 separately from the gaming state designation command, but the short-time gaming state remaining number (J) and the high probability gaming state remaining number ( X) may be included in the game state designation command and transmitted to the effect control board 102. Further, it may be configured not to transmit the time reduction number designation command or the high probability number designation command to the effect control board 102.

(Main figure normal power control processing of main control board)
With reference to FIG. 27, the ordinary map normal power control process will be described. First, the main CPU 101a loads the value of the ordinary power transmission processing data in step S401, refers to the branch address from the loaded ordinary power transmission processing data loaded in step S402, and if the ordinary power transmission processing data = 0. For example, a normal symbol memory determination process including a normal symbol determination as to whether or not to execute the auxiliary game (open the second start port 7) based on the general symbol determination information acquired based on the winning to the winning gate 10 If the normal symbol display data 22 is fluctuating based on the normal symbol determination, the normal symbol variation process (step S420) is performed. If the normal symbol display data = 2, the normal symbol display unit 22 stops the normal symbol stop process (step S430). Data = if 3 controls the opening and closing of the second start hole 7 (actuating the second start hole control device 70) and moves the process to the auxiliary game process (step S440).

(Normal design memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The normal symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the normal symbol is being displayed, the main CPU 101a ends the normal symbol storage determination process. If it is determined that there is not, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the universal figure holding number counter for counting the universal figure holding number (G) is 1 or more. When the number of held general symbols (G) is “0”, the normal symbol variation display is not performed, so the normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  When the main CPU 101a determines in step S410-2 that the number of reserved symbols (G) is “1” or more, in step S410-3, the main CPU 101a determines from the counter value (G) of the normal symbol reservation number counter “G”. "1" is subtracted and updated, a new number of reserved common figure (G) is set, and in step S410-4, a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the subtracted number of reserved general figure (G) is transmitted for production. Set in the data storage area. As a result, the drawing reservation number (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S410-5, the main CPU 101a performs a shift process of the normal symbol determination information stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area. Specifically, the common figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the storage unit with the previous number. At this time, the common symbol determination information stored in the previous storage unit is written in a predetermined processing area and is erased from the normal symbol holding storage area. Here, in order to change the display content of the normal symbol hold display device 25 in accordance with the shift of the general symbol determination information, specifically, the normal symbol hold display data for displaying the current general symbol hold number (G). Is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-6, the main CPU 101a performs a hit determination, that is, a determination of a hit determination random number stored in the normal symbol holding storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 101a checks whether the hit determination random number stored in the 0th storage unit and shifted in step S410-5 is stored in the main ROM 101b for the normal symbol hit determination table. Judgment is made. In the present embodiment, the winning determination table is associated with the start opening winning ease state (non-short-time gaming state / short-time gaming state) (see FIG. 10A), so the short-time flag storage area And a hit determination table for a normal symbol related to the current start port winning easiness state is selected.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 101a performs normal symbol determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a performs normal symbol determination by collating the normal symbol determination random number stored in the 0th storage unit with the normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 101b after being shifted in step S410-5. As described above, since this normal symbol determination table is associated with the result of the hit determination (win / loss), the result of the hit determination is confirmed, and the normal symbol determination table related to the result of the hit determination is determined. select.

  In step S410-8, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data related to the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “general symbol stop symbol data”), that is, the type of the normal symbol, based on the result of the normal symbol determination. The determined general symbol stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c, and in step S410-9, a normal effect symbol designating command corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol data is set in the effect transmission data storage region. As a result, the normal stop data is notified to the effect control board 102.

  When the determined general symbol stop pattern data is determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination, the auxiliary symbol processing pattern in FIG. 31 is used in the normal symbol stop pattern processing in FIG. Is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the second starting port 7.

  In step S410-10, the main CPU 101a performs general-purpose variation pattern determination. Specifically, since the normal pattern variation pattern determination table for performing the universal map variation pattern determination is classified according to the start opening winning easiness state, the main CPU 101a first confirms the time-short flag storage area, A general-purpose variation pattern determination table according to the current start opening winning easiness state is selected. Then, the main CPU 101a compares the random number for determining the customary pattern variation pattern stored in the 0th storage unit in the step S410-5 with the selected regular pattern variation pattern determination table, and determines the regular pattern variation pattern (ordinary diagram). (Variation time).

  In step S410-11, the main CPU 101a sets a normal pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the determined normal figure change pattern in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. The normal pattern change pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 recognizes that the change display of the normal symbol starts by receiving this command, and can execute the roulette effect described later.

  In step S410-12, the main CPU 101a sets the base map change time corresponding to the determined base map change pattern in the auxiliary game timer counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S410-13, the main CPU 101a sets the normal symbol variation display data to perform the normal symbol variation display on the ordinary symbol display device 22. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S410-14. The normal game stop symbol data is collated with the auxiliary game reference data determination table to determine auxiliary game reference data and set in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-15, the main CPU 101a sets “1” in the normal-use normal power processing data, and ends the normal symbol variation processing. The normal symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the normal symbol display device 22 to be operated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

(Normal design variation processing of the main control board)
Next, the normal symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 101a ends the normal symbol fluctuation display, in other words, whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time set in step S410-12 has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter). = 0). As a result, when it is determined that the normal symbol variation display does not end, the normal symbol variation processing is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S420-2, the main CPU 101a sets a normal effect symbol stop designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. In step S420-3, the main CPU 101a performs normal processing based on the normal symbol stop symbol data set in step S410-8. Data for stop display of general symbols for stopping display on the symbol display device 22 is set. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the normal symbol lottery. In step S420-4, the main CPU 101a sets a normal symbol stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) in the auxiliary game counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  Then, in step S420-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 to the general-purpose normal power processing data, and ends this normal symbol variation processing.

(Normal design stop processing of main control board)
Next, the normal symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S430-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the normal symbol stop display ends, in other words, whether or not the normal symbol stop time set in the auxiliary game timer counter in step S420-4 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (auxiliary game timer counter = 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the normal symbol stop display does not end, the normal symbol stop processing ends, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the normal symbol stop display is terminated, the main CPU 101a determines in step S430-2 whether or not the result of the hit determination related to the normal symbol stop process is “win”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the general symbol stop symbol data stored in the normal symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to the normal symbol. Here, if it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S430-4. If it is not determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the process proceeds to step S430-3.

  In step S430-4, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the ordinary power transmission processing data. Then, in step S430-5, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the usual figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and responds to the usual figure stop symbol based on the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game opening process is performed in which the opening time is set in the auxiliary game timer counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110. When this process is finished, the normal symbol stop process is finished.

  In step S430-3, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the ordinary figure ordinary electricity processing data, and ends the normal symbol suspension process.

(Auxiliary game processing of main control board)
The auxiliary game process will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 101a first determines in step S440-1 whether or not it is currently opening. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S440-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to step S440-5.

  In step S440-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, and when the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the auxiliary game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S440-3.

  In step S440-3, the main CPU 101a performs auxiliary game start processing. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 101a first selects the second start port opening / closing control table based on the auxiliary game reference data stored in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and enters the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. set.

  In step S440-4, the main CPU 101a performs a second start port opening process. In the second start-up opening process, first, the value stored in the ordinary power operation number storage area ("1" is added to the ordinary power operation number (D) and stored. Then, in order to operate the ordinary movable piece 70A. Is set with the energization start data of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B and based on the current general power operation number (D) with reference to the second start port opening / closing control table set in step S440-3. The opening time of the second start port 7 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

  In step S440-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to the period from the end of the last opening of the second start port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game. Therefore, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-12 when determining that it is currently ending, and shifts the process to step S440-6 when determining that it is not currently ending.

  In step S440-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second start port 7 is being opened. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second start port 7 is open, whether or not the “open end condition” for ending the opening of the second start port 7 is satisfied in step S440-7. Determine. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the starting opening prescribed winning counter has reached a prescribed (maximum) number (for example, 10), or that the opening time of one opening of the second starting opening 7 has elapsed ( Auxiliary game timer counter = 0) is adopted. Then, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-8 when determining that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, and ends the auxiliary game process when determining that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied. .

  In step S440-8, the main CPU 101a performs a second start port closing process. In the second start port closing process, energization stop data of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B is set to close the second start port 7, and the second start port opening / closing control table set in step S440-3 is set. The closing time of the second start port 7 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter on the basis of the current general electric operation number (D). As a result, the second start port 7 is closed.

  In step S440-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied and the auxiliary game is ended. The auxiliary game end condition is that the number of times the second start port 7 is opened with a pre-set operation number (D) or the counter value of the second start port prescribed winning counter is the maximum number (for example, 10) ). If the main CPU 101a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-10. If the main CPU 101a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process. .

  In step S440-10, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game end process of setting “0” in the general electric operation number storage area and setting “0” in the second start opening prize regulation counter. That is, the general electric operation number storage area and the second start opening prescribed winning counter are cleared.

  In step S440-11, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command corresponding to the normal-design stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area, and at the same time, the ending time according to the standard-design stop symbol data based on the auxiliary game control table. Is set in the auxiliary game timer counter.

  When determining that the second start port 7 is not open in step S440-6, the main CPU 101a determines in step S440-13 whether or not the closing time set in step S440-8 has elapsed. To do. Note that the closing time is also determined by whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0 as in the opening time. As a result, when determining that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game process, and when determining that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S440-4.

  In step S440-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S440-14 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that it is not, the auxiliary game process is terminated.

  In step S440-14, the main CPU 101a sets the ordinary power transmission process data = 0, and ends the auxiliary game process.

(Control processing of production control board)
Next, a control process executed by the sub CPU 102a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

(Production control board main processing)
First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. This main process is executed when a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a when power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a.

  First, in step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main process program is read from the sub ROM 102b, and an initialization process for initializing the sub RAM 102c in which flags and commands are stored is performed.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a determines an icon display mode determination random number, an effect symbol stop display pattern determination random number, a look-ahead zone effect scenario determination random number, a final number determination random number, a precursor effect scenario determination random number, and a variation effect pattern, which will be described later. An effect random number update process is performed for updating the effect random number used for determination for controlling the effect, including a determination random number, an effect mode determination random number, and the like.

  Note that a random number counter is provided in the sub-RAM 102c for each of various random numbers constituting the production random number. In the effect random number update process, “1” is added to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the production random number. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. Then, in the update of the random number, when the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized, different initial value random numbers are provided to the various production random numbers instead of making the maximum values of the various random number ranges different, When updating the random number, if the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, each random value may be newly updated from the initial random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control board)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. This timer interruption process is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102.

  First, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs time control processing for updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs command analysis processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 102a performs processing for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

  When the effect control board 102 receives the command transmitted from the main control board 101, the effect control board 102 performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, processing for analyzing the received command is performed in the command analysis processing.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs a customer waiting display control process for controlling a special symbol variation display, an image display in a customer waiting state in which a special game (a jackpot game) is not executed, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a checks an input signal from the effect button detection switch 18a or the selection button detection switch 19a, and suggests a jackpot determination result based on an operation on the effect button 18A or the selection button 19A. An effect input control process for executing an effect or the like is performed.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a can execute the game information related to the game to be notified (displayed) in the current game state (right-handed information for prompting the player to launch a game ball in the right region of the game region 2A, the probability-change game state). High probability remaining number information that is the remaining number of fluctuation display that becomes, the remaining number of time display information that is the remaining number of variable display that can be executed in the low-probability short-time gaming state, jackpot that occurred while the short-time gaming state continues Game information display control processing for causing the image display device 14 to display (such as left-hand hit information that prompts the player to launch a game ball in the left area of the game area 2A).

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a performs right-handed display control related to display control of first right-handed information (first right-handed image) to third right-handed information (second right-handed image) displayed on the image display device 14. Process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1800, the sub CPU 102a performs left-handed display control related to display control of first left-handed information (first left-handed image) to third left-handed information (second left-handed image) displayed on the image display device 14. Process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1900, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing for transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S2000, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing of production control board)
The command analysis processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives a command and determines whether the command is stored in the reception buffer. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start slot winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1303. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command is not a starting opening winning designation command, the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a executes a predetermined notice over a variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols based on the result of the prior determination, a hold icon displayed on the image display device 14 and a change. A start opening winning process is performed for determining the so-called pre-reading notice effect, setting information about the pre-reading notice effect, such as an icon change notice for changing the display mode of the middle icon, and the command analysis process is terminated. The start opening winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as the continuous notice effect, the pre-read zone effect in which the zone display effect and the zone effect are performed by the image display device 14 and the audio output device 15 in one or a plurality of change effects including the notice effect change effect, the change of the notice target Continuous step-up notice effect in which stepwise effect effects are performed by the image display device 14 and effect accessory device 17 over one or more variable effects including effects, and one or more variable effects before the noticeable variable effects. An image over one or a plurality of variation effects including a chance eye notice effect and a notice subject change effect that stops and displays the effect symbols (TZ1 to TZ3) in an array having a predetermined regularity on the image display device 14 An image over one or a plurality of fluctuation effects including a line warning effect for performing a predetermined word effect on the display device 14 and the audio output device 15 and a variable effect for a notice target. In Display device 14 and the audio output device 15 is adapted to perform a five effects announcement attraction for performing a predetermined effect effect.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, it moves the process to step S1305, and if it determines that the command is not a special symbol storage designation command, it moves the process to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a updates the special figure hold number (U1, U2) stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c, which will be described later, according to the special symbol storage designation command, or the effect information hold storage area. This command analysis is performed by performing a hold information update process for shifting various production information stored in the display, or displaying the hold icons (holding specific information) corresponding to the number of special figure holds on the image display device 14. The process ends. The hold information update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1307, and if it determines that the command is not a gaming state designation command, moves the process to step S1309.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a performs a gaming state update process for updating the gaming state stored in the predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 102c to the gaming state specified by the gaming state designation command. In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect mode setting process for setting any one of a plurality of effect modes related to the execution of the variable effect, and ends the command analysis process. The effect mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a variation effect classification mode (category) performed by an effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to a special symbol change display executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. In the present embodiment, there are provided three types of effect modes: effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C.

  The effect mode A is a normal effect mode indicating that the game state is disadvantageous for the player set corresponding to the normal game state which is the low probability game state and the non-time-saving game state. The effect mode B is an effect mode that represents a game state that is most advantageous to the player and is set corresponding to a probability variation game state that is a high-probability game state and a short-time game state. The effect mode C is an effect mode indicating that the game state is the second most advantageous game state set corresponding to the low probability game state and the low-probability short-time game state.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect designating command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step S1310. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command is not an effect symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step S1311.

  In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a is stopped on an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 14 as a result of the variation effect (special symbol lottery effect) performed during the special symbol variation display. An effect symbol stop display pattern determination process for determining the arrangement (combination) of effect symbols is performed. The effect symbol stop display pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1312, and if it determines that the command is not a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1316. .

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a performs a variation effect pattern determination process for determining a variation effect pattern which is an effect content (aspect) of the variation effect (special drawing lottery effect) performed during the special symbol variation display. The variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 1313, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not to execute the correct effect that definitely notifies that the result of the special symbol change display (change effect) is a big hit, and determines the correct effect (single notification effect). The certain effect production | generation determination process which determines an execution aspect is performed. The correct effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 1314, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether to start a prefetching zone effect, which is a kind of prefetching notice (production) based on the predetermination result, and performs prefetching zone effect execution determination for performing processing for starting the prefetching zone effect. Process. The prefetch zone effect execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a simply refers to a pending icon or a changing icon (hereinafter referred to as a holding icon or a changing icon) displayed on the image display device 14 based on the prior determination result. Also, icon change notice execution is performed to determine whether or not to change to a special mode or a different type of special mode with execution of action effects (throwing kiss notice, handshake meeting notice). Judgment processing is performed, and this command analysis processing is terminated. The icon change notice execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation stop designation command, it moves the process to step S1317. If it determines that there is no special figure fluctuation stop designation command, it moves the process to step S1319. .

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect symbol fluctuation stop process for setting an effect symbol stop control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, which indicates that the effect symbol is stopped by causing the effect symbol to be stopped. The effect symbol fluctuation stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize that the variation effect is ended by receiving the effect symbol stop control command, and cause the effect symbol to be stopped and display the stop effect.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a pre-read zone effect end determination process for ending the pre-read zone effect or the gaze zone precursor effect when the special symbol variation display ends, and ends the command analysis process. The pre-read zone effect end determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a high probability count designation command or a short time count designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a high probability count designation command or a short time count designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves to step S1320 and determines that the command is not a high probability count designation command or a short time count designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step S1321.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a updates the remaining number of times of high probability, which is the remaining number of fluctuation display (variable effect) that can be executed in the probability variation gaming state based on the received high probability number designation command, or designates the received short time number Based on the command, the remaining number of times update processing for updating the remaining number of times that is the remaining number of the variation display (variation effect) that can be executed in the low-probability short-time gaming state is performed, and this command analysis processing is terminated.

  In step S1321, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game opening designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1322, and if it determines that there is no jackpot game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1324.

  In step S1322, the sub CPU 102a determines an opening effect pattern that is an effect form of the opening effect performed during the opening of the jackpot game, and sets an opening effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined opening effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. An opening effect pattern determination process is performed.

  The opening effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1900, and the opening effect of the jackpot game is executed by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1323, the sub CPU 102a updates the number of consecutive games, which is the number of consecutive games that is the number of jackpot games continuously generated while the short-time game state (including the high and low accuracy time) continues. Process this command analysis process.

  Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed in the normal game state, the number of consecutive games is set to “1”, and the jackpot in the short-time game state (including the short game state with high probability and the short game state with low probability) When the game is executed, a process of adding “1” to the number of consecutive resorts is performed.

  In step S1324, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, it moves the process to step S1325. If it determines that there is no round designation command, it moves the process to step S1326.

  In step S1325, the sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern that is a mode of the round effect performed during the round of the jackpot game, and sets a round effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined round effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Round effect pattern determination processing is performed, and this command analysis processing is terminated. The round effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the round effect of the jackpot game is executed by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1326, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game ending designation command (jackpot game ending designation command). If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game ending designation command, it moves the process to step S1327, and if it determines that the command is not a jackpot game ending designation command, it ends this command analysis processing.

  In step S1327, the sub CPU 102a determines an ending effect pattern which is an effect mode of the ending effect performed during the ending of the jackpot game, and sets an ending effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined ending effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The jackpot game ending effect pattern determination process is performed, and the command analysis process is terminated. The ending effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the ending effect of the big hit game is executed by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

(Description of pre-read zone production, icon display, icon display area)
Before explaining the start opening winning process shown in FIG. 36, first, the pre-read zone effect, the hold icon display, the changing icon display, etc. performed based on the prior determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command will be described. .

(Pre-reading zone production)
First, the prefetch zone effect will be described. The look-ahead zone effect indicates that the expectation (expected value) of winning the jackpot is high over one or more variable effects (variable display of special symbols) (special game is expected to be executed) This is a pre-reading notice effect, which can be executed in the effect mode A set in the normal gaming state in the present embodiment, and is performed based on the prior determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command.

  While the pre-reading zone effect is being executed, a zone background image dedicated to the pre-reading zone effect is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 (there is a portion not shown), and a zone BGM dedicated to the pre-reading zone effect is output as a sound. The zone illumination dedicated to the pre-read zone production is output from the device 15 and performed in the production lighting device 16. The zone background image, the zone BGM, and the zone illumination can be collectively referred to as a zone effect.

  In addition, as an effect related to the pre-reading zone effect, a zone turning effect is provided. The zone-rolling effect is an effect that tells whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed. In the change display and stop display of the effect symbol, a special effect symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol”) dedicated to the zone effect effect is displayed. Done with. In the present embodiment, the zone turning effect is performed using a special special symbol, but it is also possible to use a special directing symbol that is not dedicated to the zone punching effect, but is different from the normal one. It is also possible to stop the display of chance chances (predetermined combinations of effect designs) with a normal effect design. Furthermore, the zone turning effect can be performed using other effect images (characters, etc.) instead of the effect symbol, and other effect devices (for example, the audio output device 15 and the effect) that are not the image display device 14. For example, by causing the lighting device 16 or the like) to perform a certain aspect of the effect.

  In the present embodiment, a zone-rolling success effect and a zone-rolling failure effect are provided as the types of zone-rolling effects. The zone-rolling success effect is composed of an effect that tells whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is executed and an effect that notifies that the pre-reading zone effect is executed after the effect. In the zone-turning success effect, it is notified that the pre-read zone effect is executed by stopping and displaying a combination of special symbols set in advance. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect is executed from the start of the change display of the effect symbol (including the re-change display in the pseudo-continuous effect) which is started after the zone-turning success effect is executed.

  On the other hand, the zone-rolling failure effect is composed of an effect that tells whether or not the pre-read zone effect is executed and an effect that informs that the pre-read zone effect after the effect is not executed. In the zone turning failure effect, only a part of the combination of special symbols set in advance is stopped and displayed, so that it is notified that the prefetch zone effect is not executed. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect is not executed in the change display of the effect symbol (including the re-change display in the pseudo-continuous effect) that is started after the zone turning failure effect is executed. However, in the variation display of the effect symbol (including the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect) that is started after the zone-rolling failure effect is executed, the zone-rolling success effect can be executed. The pre-reading zone effect is executed from the start of the change display of the effect symbol (including the re-change display in the pseudo-continuous effect) that is started after the zone-turning success effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as a special symbol used for the zone-turning effect, a special symbol including the characters “prefetch” (referred to as “prefetch” symbol) and a special symbol including the characters “zone” (“zone”). And a special symbol including the characters “rush” (referred to as “rush” symbol). Zone special effects in which all of these “pre-read” symbols, “zone” symbols, and “inrush” symbols are stopped and displayed are “zone-successful directing effects”. These “pre-read” symbols, “zone” symbols And the zone turning effect in which only some special symbols of the “rush” symbol are stopped and displayed is the “zone turning failure effect”. The zone-rolling failure effect is a zone where the “pre-read” symbol and the “zone” symbol are stopped and displayed as some special symbols, and the “pre-read” symbol is only stopped and displayed as some special symbols. It consists of a roar failure production 2.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbols are stopped one by one. For example, in a zone-successful production, the “look ahead” symbol stops first, then the “zone” symbol stops, and finally the “rush” symbol decelerates and stops. All the special symbols are arranged by stopping the symbols at preset stop positions. The period from when the “prefetch” symbol is first stopped to when the “rush” symbol is stopped last constitutes an effect as to whether or not the prefetch zone effect is executed.

  On the other hand, in the zone hit failure production, for example, the “look ahead” symbol stops first, then the “zone” symbol stops, and finally the “rush” symbol stops while decelerating. Then, it slides past a preset stop position, and as a result, only some special symbols are arranged. The period from when the “prefetch” symbol is first stopped until the “rush” symbol slips constitutes an effect as to whether or not the prefetch zone effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, as a mode of “all special symbols are aligned”, “look ahead” symbol, “zone” symbol and “rush” symbol are gradually stopped, but all these special symbols are simultaneously aligned. In other words, it is possible to make all the special symbols suddenly align without performing the effect of whether or not the prefetch zone effect is executed.

(Icon display)
Next, the hold icon display and the changing icon display will be described. The hold icon display is to display a hold icon in a first hold icon display area 141 and a second hold icon display area 143 described later. In the hold icon, the special symbol determination information is stored in the main RAM 101c in the first start port detection signal input process in step S230 or the second start port detection signal input process in step S240, and the special symbol variation display (or the special symbol lottery) ), But it is in a suspended state that cannot immediately start the variable display of the special symbol, so the right to execute the variable display of the special symbol in the reserved state (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol pending”) ) And is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  The hold icon is a first hold icon representing the right to execute the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning at the first starting port 6 and the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning at the second starting port 7 (Hereinafter referred to simply as “hold icon” when referring to both the first hold icon and the second hold icon).

  The changing icon display is to display a changing icon in a changing icon display area 142 described later. The changing icon is an icon (image) representing a changing display of the special symbol being executed corresponding to the special symbol determination information stored in the storage area of the special symbol of the main RAM 101c, and is the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. Is displayed. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed, if the start condition of the symbol variation display is established for the special figure hold indicated by the hold icon, this corresponds to the symbol variation display related to the establishment of the start condition. The hold icon is displayed as a floating icon. In the following, when both the held icon and the changing icon are indicated, they are simply referred to as “icons”.

  In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a special mode are set as icon display modes. The normal mode is a standard display mode for icons, and the special mode is a special display mode that suggests or notifies predetermined items set in advance. In the present embodiment, one type of normal mode is set, and the special mode is classified into a plurality of types depending on the content to be suggested or notified. In this embodiment, the special mode is classified into the first to fourth special modes, and the hold icon changes as a pre-reading notice effect by displaying the hold icon in a special mode or changing the type of the special mode. The advance notice is executed, and the changing icon change notice is executed by displaying the changing icon in a special form or changing the type of the special form. The icon display mode is not limited to these normal mode, first special mode, second special mode, third special mode, and fourth special mode, and can be set as appropriate.

  The normal mode is a standard display mode and is a standard for predetermined items set in advance. As shown in FIG. 59, the icon of the normal mode icon is circular, and the color of the normal mode icon is white.

  The first special mode is a display mode that suggests that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot and / or the expectation degree of the jackpot win, and can be said to be a display mode that suggests the possibility of changing to another special mode, In the present embodiment, only one type is set. As shown in FIG. 59, the icon of the first special mode icon is circular, and the color of the icon of the first special mode is blinking white. That is, the first special mode can be said to be a state in which the normal mode is blinking. Note that the expectation degree for winning a jackpot suggested by the first special mode is the normal mode <the first special mode.

  The second special mode is a display mode that indicates the possibility of winning the jackpot and / or the expectation level of the jackpot winning. In the present embodiment, as the type of the second special mode, the expected jackpot winning expectation level 8 types of the second special modes 11 to 15 and the second special modes 21 to 23 different from each other are set.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the icons of the second special modes 11 to 15 are the same in the silhouette of one person regardless of the type, and the colors of the icons of the second special modes 11 to 15 are the types. Depending on. Specifically, the icon color of the second special mode 11 is white, the color of the icon of the second special mode 12 is green, the color of the icon of the second special mode 13 is red, and the color of the icon of the second special mode 14 Is a zebra pattern, and the color of the icon of the second special mode 15 is rainbow.

  For the jackpot winning expectations according to the second special modes 11 to 15, the normal mode <the first special mode <the second special mode 11 <the second special mode 12 <the second special mode 13 <the second special mode 14 <the second It is higher in the order of special mode 15. Note that the second special mode 15 suggests that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is 100%, that is, the big win winning is notified.

  In addition, the second special modes 11 to 14 can occur for both the hold icon and the changing icon, but the second special mode 15 occurs only for the changing icon. This is because if the hold icon representing the special figure hold is displayed in the second special mode 15 and the notification of the jackpot winning is informed at the stage where the change display of the special symbol related to the special figure hold is not started, the interest of the game is lowered. This is because there is a fear. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and the hold icon can also be displayed in the second special mode 15.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the icons of the second special modes 21 to 23 are circular regardless of the type, and the colors of the icons of the second special modes 21 to 23 differ depending on the type. Specifically, the color of the icon of the second special mode 21 is yellow and the letters “SP” are drawn to suggest execution of the SP / SPSP reach production, and the color of the icon of the second special mode 22 is purple and a big hit is expected Characters of “Intense heat” suggesting that the degree is high are drawn, and characters of “Choose” are suggested to suggest that the color of the icon of the second special mode 23 is gold and jackpot.

  The jackpot winning expectations according to the second special modes 21 to 23 are higher in the order of normal mode <first special mode <second special mode 21 <second special mode 22 <second special mode 23. Note that the second special mode 23 suggests that the degree of expectation of winning the big hit is 100%, that is, the big win winning is notified.

  In addition, the second special modes 21 and 22 can occur for both the hold icon and the changing icon, but the second special mode 23 occurs only for the changing icon. This is because if the hold icon indicating the special figure hold is displayed in the second special mode 23 and the change of the special symbol related to the special figure hold is not started and the big win is notified, the interest of the game is lowered. This is because there is a fear. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and the hold icon can also be displayed in the second special mode 23.

  In the present embodiment, the normal mode and the first special mode are common modes that are used regardless of whether the normal game state or the short-time game state (including high-probability short time and low-probability time short). The second special modes 11 to 15 are normally limited modes used only in the normal gaming state, and the second special modes 21 to 23 are in the short-time gaming state (including high-probability time short and low-probability time short). It is a short time limited mode used in a limited manner.

  That is, the icon type (change number) displayed on the image display device 14 in the normal gaming state is set to be larger than the icon type (change number) displayed on the image display device 14 in the short-time gaming state. Has been. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to prevent the player from getting bored in the normal gaming state where the variation time of the special symbol tends to be longer than in the short-time gaming state. In addition, since there are fewer types of icons (number of changes) in the short-time game state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the icon change in the short-time game state where the variation time of the special symbol tends to be shorter than in the normal game state. Become.

  The normal mode, the first special mode, and the second special mode are not common modes for the normal gaming state and the short-time gaming state (including high-probable time short and low-probable time short), but the normal mode for the short-time gaming state ( For example, the icon shape is a square and the icon color is blue), the first special mode for the short-time gaming state (for example, the icon shape is a square and the icon color is blinking blue), the short-time gaming state The second special mode (for example, the icon shape is a square and the icon color is the same) may be set. Also, the normal mode and the first special mode may be different between the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state.

  The third special mode suggests an expectation for execution of the prefetch zone effect (hereinafter referred to as “prefetch zone execution expectation”). When the types of the third special mode are roughly classified, six types of third special modes 1 to 6 having different expected-reading effect execution expectation levels are set.

  Here, in the third special modes 1 to 3 (11 to 35), an icon (hereinafter referred to as “zone effect target icon”) corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the prefetch zone effect or the zone turning effect to be executed. ), And the third special modes 4 to 6 (41 to 65) are icons that are not icons corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the pre-read zone effect or the zone turning effect to be executed (hereinafter, "Zone effect non-target icon"). In other words, the zone effect non-target icon is an icon (previous to the start opening prize designation command before or after the icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the pre-read zone effect or the zone turning effect to be executed. Or an icon for which a variation effect is executed later).

  As shown in FIG. 60, the icon shapes of the third special modes 1 to 3 (11 to 35) include the icon shapes according to the second special mode. Specifically, the icon shape of the third special mode 1 (11 to 15) has the silhouette of one person on each of the left side and the right side of the single person's silhouette according to the second special mode. At the same time, a character indicating the execution of the pre-read zone effect, “? The icon shape of the third special mode 2 (21 to 25) is that the silhouettes of two people are arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode, respectively, and a substantially central portion. Are marked with “Δ zone Δ” and a character indicating that the pre-read zone effect is executed and that the expected degree of execution is higher than “? Zone?” Of the third special mode 1. The icon shape of the third special mode 3 (31 to 35) is such that the silhouettes of four people are arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode, respectively, and a substantially central portion. Is attached with a character for notifying the execution of the pre-read zone effect “○ zone ○”.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the icons of the third special modes 4 to 6 (41 to 65) also have a shape including the icon of the second special mode. Specifically, the icon shape of the third special mode 4 (41 to 45) includes a single person silhouette on each of the left and right sides of the single person silhouette according to the second special mode. It has a configuration. The icon shape of the third special mode 5 (51 to 55) is configured such that the silhouettes of two people are arranged on the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. . The shape of the icon of the third special mode 6 (61 to 65) is such that the silhouettes of three people are arranged on the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. . In the third special mode 4 to the third special mode 6, unlike the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3, characters such as “? Zone?” Are not attached. That is, it is also suggested that “? Zone?” In the third special mode 1, “Δ zone Δ” in the third special mode 2, and “○ zone ○” in the third special mode 3 are the zone effect target icons. ing.

  About the prefetch zone execution expectation degree which concerns on a zone production | presentation object icon, it becomes high in order of (normal aspect <) 2nd special aspect <3 special aspect 1 <3 special aspect 2 <3 special aspect 3. On the other hand, the prefetch zone execution expectation degree related to the zone effect non-target icon increases in the order of (normal mode <) second special mode <third special mode 4 <third special mode 5 <third special mode 6). Yes.

  Here, the second special mode is included with respect to the pre-read zone execution expectation level related to the zone effect target icon and the zone effect non-target icon. This is because the icon display mode is set to the second special mode and the third special mode. This is because a zone precursor effect that suggests or notifies the execution of a prefetch zone effect, which will be described later, is executed, and the second special mode also suggests a prefetch zone execution expectation.

  As described above, the icon shapes of the second special mode and the third special mode include the silhouettes of people. The number of silhouettes of the icons of the second special mode is “1”, and the third special mode 1 The number of silhouettes of the icons of 4 is “3”, the number of silhouettes of the icons of the third special modes 2 and 5 is “5”, and the number of silhouettes of the icons of the third special modes 3 and 6 Has "7" people. The more the number of icon silhouettes is, the higher the expectation of execution of the look-ahead zone is.

  In the present embodiment, each of the third special mode 1 and the third special mode 4, the third special mode 2 and the third special mode 5, the third special mode 3 and the third special mode 6 is the display mode. The attributes of the target icons are different (zone effect target icons and zone effect non-target icons), but they have a corresponding relationship, and the same prefetch zone execution expectation is set. That is, the prefetch zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 1 is the same as the prefetch zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 4, and the prefetch zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 2 The prefetch zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 5 is the same, and the prefetch zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 3 and the prefetch zone execution expectation degree suggested by the third special aspect 6 are the same. .

  The third special modes 3 and 6 suggest that the prefetch zone execution expectation is 100%, that is, notify that the prefetch zone effect is executed. Although details will be described later, the icons are displayed in the third special modes 3 and 6 even when the prefetch zone effect is executed. Therefore, the third special modes 3 and 6 may notify that the prefetch zone effect is being executed.

  In the following, the third special modes 1 and 4 are referred to as “prefetch zone effect suggesting mode 1”, the third special modes 2 and 5 are referred to as “prefetch zone effect suggesting mode 2”, and the third special mode. Aspects 3 and 6 are referred to as “prefetch zone effect informing modes”. Further, when both the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 and the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2 are indicated, it is simply referred to as “prefetch zone effect suggestion mode”.

  In addition, as described above, the shape of the icon according to the third special mode is composed of a person's silhouette and includes the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. The part of the silhouette of one person according to the above is the main silhouette part, and the part of the silhouette of the person on the left side and the right side of the main silhouette part is the sub silhouette part.

  And about the main silhouette part of the icon which concerns on each of the 3rd special mode 1-the 3rd special mode 6, the multiple types of color is set similarly to the 2nd special mode. According to the color of the main silhouette part, the third special mode 1 is divided into a third special mode 11 to a third special mode 15, and the third special mode 2 is divided into a third special mode 21 to a third special mode 25. The third special mode 3 is divided into a third special mode 31 to a third special mode 35, the third special mode 4 is divided into a third special mode 41 to a third special mode 45, and the third special mode 5 is The third special mode 51 is divided into the third special mode 55 and the third special mode 55 is divided into the third special mode 61 and the third special mode 65.

  The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 11, the third special aspect 21, the third special aspect 31, the third special aspect 41, the third special aspect 51, and the third special aspect 61 is white. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 12, the third special aspect 22, the third special aspect 32, the third special aspect 42, the third special aspect 52, and the third special aspect 62 is green. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 13, the third special aspect 23, the third special aspect 33, the third special aspect 43, the third special aspect 53, and the third special aspect 63 is red. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 14, the third special aspect 24, the third special aspect 34, the third special aspect 44, the third special aspect 54 and the third special aspect 64 is a zebra pattern. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 35 and the third special aspect 65 is iridescent. Similar to the second special mode, the color of the main silhouette portion of the third special mode suggests the big win winning expectation, and increases in the order of white <green <red <zebra pattern <rainbow color.

  On the other hand, the 4th special mode suggests or notifies the predetermined matter regarding handshake meeting notice. The handshake event notice is a look-ahead notice effect that changes the display mode of the changing icon based on the prior determination result indicated by the start opening prize designation command and suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. Executable in mode A. In addition, although you may perform based on the determination result at the time of the start of a change production, the detail of handshake meeting notice is mentioned later.

  When the types of the fourth special mode are roughly divided, four types of the fourth special mode 1 to the fourth special mode 4 are set. Here, in the fourth special mode 1 (11 to 15), a changing icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the handshake meeting notice to be executed (hereinafter referred to as a “changing icon for the handshake meeting notice target”). The fourth special mode 2 (21 to 24) is a hold icon (hereinafter referred to as a “shake event notice target hold icon”) corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the handshake meeting notice to be executed. ) Is displayed, and the fourth special mode 3 (31) is a variable icon (hereinafter, “shake handshake”) corresponding to a start opening prize designation command that is not a start opening prize designation command that causes the handshake meeting notice to be executed. The 4th special mode 4 (41) is a start opening prize finger that is not a start opening winning designation command that causes a handshake meeting advance notice to be executed. Hold icon corresponding to the command (hereinafter, referred to as a "handshake meeting notice non-target Hold icon") is a display mode of.

  In other words, the handshake meeting notice non-target hold icon is the icon (before or after) corresponding to the start opening prize designation command before or after the icon corresponding to the start opening prize designation command that causes the handshake meeting notice to be executed. This is an icon for executing a variation effect).

  As shown in FIG. 62, the shape of the changing icon in the fourth special mode 1 (11 to 15) includes a silhouette of a person shaking hands as viewed from the side and a heart attached to the chest around the silhouette. It consists of and. The shape of the hold icon in the fourth special mode 2 (21 to 24) includes a silhouette of a person who has taken a predetermined pose as viewed from the front and a heart attached to the chest of the silhouette. “Heart” attached in common to the icons of the fourth special mode 1 and the fourth special mode 2 indicates that the handshake event is to be notified.

  The shape of the changing icon of the fourth special mode 3 (31) is composed of the same silhouette of the person as the changing icon according to the fourth special mode 1, and the heart is the same as the fourth special mode 1. Not attached. The shape of the hold icon of the fourth special mode 4 (41) is also composed of the same silhouette of the person as the hold icon according to the fourth special mode 2, and no heart is attached as in the fourth special mode 2. .

  Moreover, about the part of the person's silhouette contained in the icon of the 4th special aspect 1-the 4th special aspect 2, the multiple types of color is set similarly to the 2nd special aspect. According to the color of the silhouette portion, the fourth special mode 1 is divided into five types of the fourth special mode 11 to the fourth special mode 15, and the fourth special mode 2 is the fourth special mode 21 to the fourth special mode 24. It is divided into four types.

  The color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the fourth special aspect 11 and the fourth special aspect 21 is white, the color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the fourth special aspect 12 and the fourth special aspect 22 is green, The color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the special aspect 13 and the fourth special aspect 23 is red, and the color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the fourth special aspect 14 and the fourth special aspect 24 is a zebra pattern. The color of the silhouette portion of the icon according to aspect 15 is rainbow.

  The reason why the rainbow color is set only in the fourth special mode 1 is that the handshake meeting notice target hold icon is displayed in rainbow color, and the special symbol change display related to the special figure hold corresponding to the icon has not started. This is because if the big win is announced at the stage, the interest of the game may be reduced. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and a rainbow-colored display mode can be provided for the handshake meeting advance notice target hold icon.

  Further, in this embodiment, the colors related to the non-target change icon for the handshake meeting notice and the asymmetric hold icon for the handshake meeting notice are one type of white. Similarly to the hold icon for the handshake event notice, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by the color.

  As described above, the normal mode and the special mode are set as the display mode of the icon, and the display mode of the icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode during the game, or from a certain special mode to a different special mode. In this way, the interest of the game is improved. The icon display mode change pattern will be described later.

(Icon display area)
Next, the hold icon display areas 141 and 143 for displaying the hold icon and the changing icon display area 142 for displaying the changing icon will be described. As shown in FIG. 82A, the hold icon display areas 141 and 143 and the changing icon display area 142 are formed in the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  The first hold icon display area 141 in which the first hold icon is displayed is formed on the lower left side of the display unit 140, and the second hold icon display area 143 in which the second hold icon is displayed is on the lower right side of the display unit 140. The changing icon display area 142 in which the changing icon is displayed is formed between the first holding icon display area 141 and the second holding icon display area 143 so as not to overlap each other.

  The first hold icon display area 141 is divided into a first display part 141a, a second display part 141b, a third display part 141c, and a fourth display part 141d from the side of the changing icon display area 142. Each display part 141a-141d respond | corresponds to the 1st memory | storage part-the 4th memory | storage part of the 1st special symbol holding | maintenance storage area of main RAM101c.

  Therefore, the 1st hold icon displayed on the 1st display part 141a represents the special figure hold based on the special figure determination information memorize | stored in the 1st memory | storage part of a 1st special symbol reservation memory area, and the 2nd display part 141b The first hold icon displayed on the screen represents the special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the second storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the first hold icon displayed on the third display unit 141c The icon represents special figure hold based on special figure determination information stored in the third storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the first hold icon displayed on the fourth display unit 141d is the first special symbol. Represents special figure hold based on special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the hold storage area.

  The second hold icon display area 143 is divided into a first display section 143a, a second display section 143b, a third display section 143c, and a fourth display section 143d from the side of the changing icon display area 142. Each display part 143a-143d respond | corresponds to the 1st memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part of the 2nd special symbol holding | maintenance storage area of main RAM101c.

  Therefore, the 2nd reservation icon displayed on the 1st display part 143a represents the special figure reservation based on the special figure determination information memorize | stored in the 1st memory | storage part of a 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, and the 2nd display part 143b The second hold icon displayed on the screen represents the special figure hold based on the special figure determination information stored in the second storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold icon displayed on the third display unit 143c The icon represents special figure hold based on special figure determination information stored in the third storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold icon displayed on the fourth display unit 143d is the second special symbol Represents special figure hold based on special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the hold storage area.

  Further, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 represents the changing display of the special symbol currently being executed based on the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol storage area (the 0th storage unit). .

  Note that the changing icon display area 142 in which the changing icon is displayed is provided on the pedestal image D in order to clearly distinguish it from the first holding icon display area 141 and the second holding icon display area 143. The broken line portion in FIG. 82 (a) is for showing each display portion and display area and is not actually displayed, but may be displayed.

(Processing at the start opening prize of the production control board)
The start opening winning process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-1, the sub CPU 102a stores the start opening winning designation command determined to have been received in step S1304 in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, the effect information hold storage area includes a first special figure hold number storage area in which the first special figure hold number (U1) is stored and a second special figure hold number (U2). A second special figure hold number storage area to be stored, a first effect information hold storage area in which effect information related to a pre-reading notice (effect) based on the result of the first advance determination process is stored, and a second advance determination process The second effect information hold storage area in which the effect information related to the pre-reading notice (effect) based on the result is stored, and the effect information shifted from the first effect information hold storage area or the second effect information hold storage area is stored. The production information is composed of the storage area.

  The first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area are divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, like the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area of the main RAM 101c. It has been. Further, the effect information storage area corresponds to the currently executed variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol, and is a storage area common to the first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area. For convenience, the 0th storage unit is used.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), each storage unit has a start opening prize designation command area in which a start opening prize designation command is stored as a storage area for production information related to the pre-reading notice (production), and a continuous notice presentation effect. A continuous notice effect execution information area for storing continuous notice effect execution information representing a scenario and the like, and an icon display form scenario area for storing icon display form scenario data representing an icon display form scenario to be described later are provided.

  In step S1303-1, if the received start opening winning designation command is the first starting opening winning designation command, the first special figure hold number among the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the first effect information hold storage area. Store in the storage unit corresponding to (U1). Moreover, if the received start opening winning designation command is the second starting opening winning designation command, the second special figure hold number (U2) among the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the second effect information hold storage area is set. Store in the corresponding storage unit.

  In step S <b> 1303-2, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not the present is in the jackpot variation effect based on the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102 c described later. The variation effect data is identification information indicating the effect contents of the variation effect, but the variation effect data includes a jackpot determination result that triggers the execution of the variation effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the jackpot variation effect is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1303-3, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the jackpot variation effect is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1303-3.

  In step S1303-3, the sub CPU 102a is already stored in the effect information hold storage area (the first effect information hold storage area or the second effect information hold storage area) of the sub RAM 102c that newly stores the start opening winning designation command this time. It is determined whether or not all of the prior determination results related to the start opening winning designation command (change display executed in advance) are “no reach loss”. If the sub CPU 102a determines that all are “no reach loss”, the process proceeds to step S1303-4. If the sub CPU 102a determines that all are not “reach without reach”, the process proceeds to step S1303-19.

  In step S1303-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the above-described continuous notice effect execution information is stored in the continuous notice effect execution information area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the continuous notice effect execution information is stored, it moves the process to step SS1303-5, and if it determines that the continuous notice effect execution information is not stored, it moves the process to step SS1303-8.

  In step S1303-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the continuous notice effect execution information stored in the continuous notice effect execution information area of the sub RAM 102c is pre-read zone effect execution information. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is pre-read zone effect execution information, it moves the process to step S1303-6, and if it determines that it is not pre-read zone effect execution information, it moves the process to step S1303-7.

  In step S1303-6, the sub CPU 102a responds to the zone sign effect and the prefetch zone effect executed based on the prefetch zone effect execution information, and holds the hold icon (zone effect non-display) corresponding to the currently received start opening prize designation command. Determine the zone sign indication icon display mode scenario for changing the display mode of the target icon) to the display mode for the prefetch zone effect (prefetch zone effect notification mode, prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 or prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2). Then, the process proceeds to step S1303-20.

  In step S1303-7, the sub CPU 102a determines an icon display mode scenario for no icon change notice that does not change the display mode of the hold icon, and moves the process to step S1303-20. In other words, the execution of the icon change notice is restricted while a predetermined condition is established, such as during a jackpot fluctuating effect or during a continuous notice effect other than the look-ahead zone effect.

  In step S1303-8, the sub CPU 102a determines that the corresponding special figure hold number (the first special figure hold number or the second special figure hold number corresponding to the type of the special symbol specified by the start opening winning designation command received this time). It is determined whether or not the special figure hold count is greater than zero. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the corresponding special figure hold number is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S1303-9, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the corresponding special figure hold number is not greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S1303-19.

  In step S1303-9, the sub CPU 102a performs a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, after the execution of the gaze continuous notice effect in which the result of the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol that is the target of the continuous notice effect is lost) 1 time) or less. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is within the predetermined number of fluctuations, it moves the process to step S1303-19, and if it determines that it is not within the predetermined number of fluctuations, it moves the process to step S1303-10.

  In step S1303-10, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the continuous notice effect. In step S1303-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed and the type of the continuous notice effect to be executed. A table (see FIG. 38) is selected, and a continuous notice determination process is performed in which a determination regarding the continuous notice effect is made by collating a prior decision result specified by the start opening winning designation command with a random number for determining the continuous notice effect. Details of the continuous notice effect determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether execution of the continuous notice effect is determined. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the process proceeds to step S1303-13, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the non-execution of the continuous notice effect is determined, the process proceeds to step S1303-19.

  In step S <b> 1303-13, the sub CPU 102 a performs processing that branches to the next step to be executed according to the result of the continuous notice effect determination processing in step S <b> 1303-11. Specifically, when the pre-read zone effect is executed, the process proceeds to step S1303-14, and when the continuous step-up notice effect is executed, the process is moved to step S1303-15 to execute the chance eye notice effect. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S1303-16. If the speech notice effect is to be executed, the process is transferred to step S1303-17. If the effect notice effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1303-18.

  In step S <b> 1303-14, the sub CPU 102 a determines the execution mode of the prefetch zone effect in which the zone display effect and the zone effect are performed by the image display device 14 and the audio output device in one or a plurality of change effects including the change effect to be notified. Pre-read zone effect mode determination process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1303-20. The pre-read zone effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-15, the sub CPU 102a performs step-by-step advance notice effects in which the image display device 14 and the effect accessory device 17 perform stepwise effect effects over one or more variable effects including the noticeable change effect. The continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process for determining the execution mode is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1303-19. The continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-16, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the effect symbols (TZ1 to TZ3) in an array having a predetermined regularity on the image display device 14 over one or more change effects before the change effect to be notified. The chance eye notice effect mode determination process for determining the execution mode of the chance eye notice effect to be performed is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1303-19. The chance eye notice effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 1303-17, the sub CPU 102 a determines the execution mode of the serif notice effect that performs a predetermined serif effect on the image display device 14 and the audio output device 15 over one or more variable effects including the noticeable change effect. The notice advancement appearance mode determination process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1303-19. The serif notice effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 1303-18, the sub CPU 102 a determines the execution mode of the effect notice effect in which the image display device 14 and the audio output device 15 perform a predetermined effect effect over one or more change effects including the notice effect. Effect notice effect mode determination processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1303-19. The effect notice effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 1303-19, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not to execute an icon change notice displayed on the image display device 14 based on the prior determination result specified by the start opening winning designation command and the icons until the change effect is executed. An icon change notice determination process for determining an icon display mode scenario or the like that is a display scenario is performed. The icon change notice determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-20, the sub CPU 102a sends an icon effect control command indicating the icon display mode scenario determined in the processing of step S1303-6, step S1303-7, step 1303-19, etc. to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Set and finish the start-up winning process.

  The icon effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the icon effect control command, the image control board 105 displays the display mode of the hold icon and the changing icon corresponding to the icon effect control command in a display mode according to the icon display mode scenario, thereby predicting the icon change. Is supposed to do.

  As described above, according to the start opening winning time process of the present embodiment, when the continuous notice effect is being executed or when the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed, the continuous notice effect determination process is not executed, so that a new continuous notice is obtained. The production is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused by overlappingly executing a plurality of continuous notice effects.

  While the pre-read zone effect execution information is stored, the display mode of the hold icon (zone effect non-target icon) corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command is changed to the display mode (pre-read zone effect). Since the zone effect notification mode, the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2) are changed and the display mode of the zone effect asymmetric icon becomes the normal mode after the zone sign effect or the prefetch zone effect is ended, the zone sign effect It is possible to emphasize that the pre-read zone effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the continuous notice effect is not executed within the predetermined number of fluctuations after the execution of the Gase continuous notice effect where the result of the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol subject to the continuous notice effect is lost, the continuous notice effect is not executed. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it does not occur continuously and the player gets bored with the continuous notice effect and cannot expect. It should be noted that only the Gase continuous notice effect may not be executed within a predetermined number of fluctuations from the execution of the Gase continuous notice effect.

◆ (Continuous notice effect judgment table)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a continuous notice effect determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice effect and the type of continuous notice effect to be executed.

  In the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, the effect mode (game state), the type of special symbol specified by the start opening prize designation command, the prior determination result specified by the start opening prize designation command, and the continuous The selection rate (%) based on the random number for determining the notice effect is stored in association with the type of the continuous notice effect selected.

  Note that the five types of continuous notice effects specified in the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38 are set so that the effect period (time) in one variable effect is different. The effect period of the zone effect and the continuous step-up notice effect is relatively (relatively) long, and the effect period of the chance eye notice effect, the serif notice effect and the effect notice effect is relatively (relatively) short. In addition, the production period is different among the continuous notice productions, the production period of the look-ahead zone production is the longest, and the production period of at least the chance eye notice production, the serif notice production, and the effect notice production is an extremely short fluctuation variation. It is shorter than time.

  Of the five types of continuous notice effects specified in the continuous notice effect determination table, for the continuous step-up notice effect, the chance eye notice effect, the serif notice effect, and the effect notice effect, the movable part of the effect accessory device 17 is used. Colors such as the 17A emission color, the color scheme (color) of the production symbol image that constitutes the chance eye, the color scheme (color) of the serif image, or the color scheme (color) of the effect image Depending on the type of event, it is an effect that gives a notice (suggestion) of the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

  As the first feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, the continuous notice effect is at a lower rate in the high-probability / low-probability short-time game state (effect modes B and C) than in the normal game state (effect mode A). Is set to be executed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the effect of producing the continuous notice effect in the short-time game state in which the variation time is likely to be shorter than the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

  Note that the execution rate of the continuous notice effect in the high-probability / low-probability short-time gaming state may include 0%. In this case, the continuous notice effect is not executed in the high-precision / low-probability short-time game state. Become. However, even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. In addition, the execution ratio of the continuous notice effect in each of the normal gaming state, the high-probability short-time gaming state, and the low-probability short-time gaming state is set as follows: normal gaming state> low-probability short-time gaming state> high-probability short-time gaming state It is possible to obtain the same effect even when the short-time game state> the short game state with a low probability.

  As the second feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, the type of the continuous notice effect executed in the normal gaming state (specifically, the look-ahead zone effect, the continuous step-up notice effect, the chance eye notice effect) and There are different types of continuous notice effects (specifically, chance eye notice effects, serif notice effects, and effect notice effects) that are executed in the high-probability / low-precision short-time gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the continuous notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the types of continuous notice effects executed in the normal gaming state and the high-probability / low-probability short-time game state may be different so that they do not overlap, or the types of continuous notice effects executed in all game states are different. You may make it different so that it may not overlap. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. In addition, the number of types of continuous notice effects that are executed in all gaming states may be different, or only the number of types of continuous notice effects that are executed in a specific gaming state may be different. Furthermore, the type of continuous notice effect executed in the normal gaming state and the type of continuous notice effect executed in the high-probability / low-probability short-time game state may be the same.

  A third feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38 is that a plurality of types of continuous notice effects with different effect periods (time) during one variation effect are set to be executed in each gaming state. Is mentioned. By doing so, the continuous notice effect becomes rich in variations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Of the multiple types of continuous notice effects executed in each gaming state, the effect period of at least two consecutive notice effects is made the same, while the effect period of at least one other continuous notice effect is made different. May be. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. Moreover, you may make the production period of all the continuous notice effects the same.

  As the fourth feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, when the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is targeted, the effect period (time) during one variable effect is relative (comparison). A continuous announcement with a relatively long production period (time) during one variation production than a short notice announcement effect (specifically, a chance notice announcement effect, a serif notice effect, and an effect notice effect). There is a point that the execution ratio of the production (specifically, the pre-reading zone production and the continuous step-up notice production) is high. In this way, it is possible to improve the production effect of the continuous notice effect in the normal gaming state in which the variation time is likely to be longer than in the high / low accuracy short-time gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game Become.

  In the normal gaming state, execution of a continuous notice effect (specifically, a chance notice notice effect, a serif notice effect, and an effect notice effect) with a relatively short (relatively) effect period (time) during one variation effect. The ratio may be 0%, and even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  As a fifth feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, when the variable display of the second special symbol in the high-probability / low-probability short-time gaming state is targeted, the effect period (time) during one variable effect Is relatively (relatively) longer than the continuous notice effect (specifically, the effect period (time) during one variation effect is relatively (relatively) shorter than the pre-read zone effect or continuous step-up notice effect. The execution ratio of the continuous notice effect (specifically, the chance notice notice effect, the serif notice effect, and the effect notice effect) is high. In this way, the variation time is likely to be shorter than the normal gaming state, and the variation time is short in the high-precision / short-time gaming state, so that the inconvenience that the continuous notice effect is executed halfway does not occur. It is possible to improve the interest of

  In addition, in the high / low-probability short-time game state, a continuous notice effect (specifically, a look-ahead zone effect or a continuous step-up notice effect) in which the effect period (time) during one change effect is relatively (relatively) long. Is not executed, but may be executed if the execution period (time) during one variation effect is lower than the execution rate of the continuous notice effect. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  As a sixth feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, a game state with a higher probability / a lower probability than a ratio of predicting the degree of expectation that is a big hit depending on the type of color in the continuous notice effect executed in the normal gaming state. In the continuous notice effect executed in step 1, the ratio of notifying the degree of expectation that is a big hit depending on the type of color is high. In this way, the player can intuitively grasp the contents of the notice even in the high / low-probability short-time game state in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

  Note that the four types of continuous notice effects (continuous step-up notice effect, chance eye notice effect, serif notice effect, and effect notice effect) that perform notice according to the type of color are performed in the normal gaming state and high accuracy / short time. You may make it the expectation degree used as the jackpot for every color of a notice and / or the expectation degree in which SP reach | attainment effect is performed by the case where it is performed in a game state.

  Specifically, the effect notice effect will be described as an example. The pre-determined result in the high-precision / short-time game state is higher than the ratio of the blue effect image displayed when the pre-determined result is lost or normal reach in the normal gaming state. By setting a high ratio of blue effect images to be displayed when the game is lost or normal reach, the expectation and / or SP reach effect will be a big hit when the blue effect image is displayed in the normal gaming state Expected to be a big hit when a blue effect image is displayed in the high-precision / low-probability short-time gaming state and / or the expectation that the SP reach production will be executed, And vice versa.

  Further, the expectation level that is a big hit for the effect images of all colors and / or the expectation level that the SP reach performance is executed is not different between the normal game state and the high / low-probability short-time game state. The expected degree of expectation when an effect image of color (for example, blue or green) is displayed and / or the expected degree of execution of the SP reach effect in the normal gaming state and the high-probability / low-probability short-time gaming state If the effect image of a color other than a predetermined color (for example, red or rainbow) is displayed, the expectation degree that is a big hit and / or the expectation degree that the SP reach effect is executed is set to the normal gaming state and the high accuracy / It may be the same in the low-probability time-short gaming state.

  In addition, for a predetermined continuous notice effect (for example, effect notice effect or chance eye notice effect), when executed in the normal gaming state and when executed in the high-probability / short-time game state, for each color of the notice The expectation that is a big hit and / or the expectation that the SP reach effect is executed are different, and for the continuous notice effect other than the predetermined continuous notice effect (for example, the continuous step-up notice effect or the serif notice effect), the normal game In the case of being executed in the state and in the case of being executed in the high-probability / short-time game state, the expectation degree that is a big hit for each color of the notice and / or the expectation degree that the SP reach effect is executed is made the same. Also good.

◆ (Modification of the continuous notice effect determination table)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a modified example of the continuous notice effect determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed and the type of continuous notice effect to be executed.

  In the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, the effect mode (game state), the type of special symbol specified by the start opening prize designation command, the prior determination result specified by the start opening prize designation command, and the continuous The selection rate (%) based on the random number for determining the notice effect is stored in association with the type of the continuous notice effect selected.

  Note that the five types of continuous notice effects specified in the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39 are set so that the effect period (time) during one variation effect is different. The effect period of the zone effect and the continuous step-up notice effect is relatively (relatively) long, and the effect period of the chance eye notice effect, the serif notice effect and the effect notice effect is relatively (relatively) short. In addition, the production period is different among the continuous notice productions, the production period of the look-ahead zone production is the longest, and the production period of at least the chance eye notice production, the serif notice production, and the effect notice production is an extremely short fluctuation variation. It is shorter than time.

  Of the five types of continuous notice effects specified in the continuous notice effect determination table, for the continuous step-up notice effect, the chance eye notice effect, the serif notice effect, and the effect notice effect, the movable part of the effect accessory device 17 is used. Colors such as the 17A emission color, the color scheme (color) of the production symbol image that constitutes the chance eye, the color scheme (color) of the serif image, or the color scheme (color) of the effect image Depending on the type of event, it is an effect that gives a notice (suggestion) of the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

  As a first feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, the continuous notice effect is higher in the high-probability / low-probability short-time game state (effect modes B and C) than in the normal game state (effect mode A). Is set to be executed. By doing in this way, the production effect in the high-probability / low-probability short-time game state in which the variation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal game state is improved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the execution rate of the continuous notice effect in the normal gaming state may be 0%. In this case, the continuous notice effect is not executed in the normal gaming state. However, even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. In addition, the execution ratio of the continuous notice effect for each of the normal game state, the high-probability short-time game state, and the low-probability short-time game state is set as follows: normal game state <low-probability short-time game state <high-probability short-time game state The same effect can be obtained even when the short-time game state <the short game state with a low probability.

  As the second feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, the type of the continuous notice effect executed in the normal gaming state (specifically, the pre-read zone effect, the continuous step-up notice effect, the chance eye notice effect) and There are different types of continuous notice effects (specifically, chance eye notice effects, serif notice effects, and effect notice effects) that are executed in the high-probability / low-precision short-time gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the continuous notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the types of continuous notice effects executed in the normal gaming state and the high-probability / low-probability short-time game state may be different so that they do not overlap, or the types of continuous notice effects executed in all game states are different. You may make it different so that it may not overlap. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. In addition, the number of types of continuous notice effects that are executed in all gaming states may be different, or only the number of types of continuous notice effects that are executed in a specific gaming state may be different. Furthermore, the type of continuous notice effect executed in the normal gaming state and the type of continuous notice effect executed in the high-probability / low-probability short-time game state may be the same.

  A third feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39 is that a plurality of types of continuous notice effects with different effect periods (time) during one variable effect are set to be executed in each gaming state. Is mentioned. By doing so, the continuous notice effect becomes rich in variations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Of the multiple types of continuous notice effects executed in each gaming state, the effect period of at least two consecutive notice effects is made the same, while the effect period of at least one other continuous notice effect is made different. May be. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. Moreover, you may make the production period of all the continuous notice effects the same.

  As the fourth feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, when the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is targeted, the effect period (time) during one variable effect is relative (comparison). A continuous announcement with a relatively long production period (time) during one variation production than a short notice announcement effect (specifically, a chance notice announcement effect, a serif notice effect, and an effect notice effect). There is a point that the execution ratio of the production (specifically, the pre-reading zone production and the continuous step-up notice production) is high. In this way, it is possible to improve the production effect of the continuous notice effect in the normal gaming state in which the variation time is likely to be longer than in the high / low accuracy short-time gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game Become.

  In the normal gaming state, execution of a continuous notice effect (specifically, a chance notice notice effect, a serif notice effect, and an effect notice effect) with a relatively short (relatively) effect period (time) during one variation effect. The ratio may be 0%, and even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  As a fifth feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, when the variable display of the second special symbol in the high-probability / low-probability short-time gaming state is targeted, the effect period (time) during one variable effect Is relatively (relatively) longer than the continuous notice effect (specifically, the effect period (time) during one variation effect is relatively (relatively) shorter than the pre-read zone effect or continuous step-up notice effect. The execution ratio of the continuous notice effect (specifically, the chance notice notice effect, the serif notice effect, and the effect notice effect) is high. In this way, the variation time is likely to be shorter than the normal gaming state, and the variation time is short in the high-precision / short-time gaming state, so that the inconvenience that the continuous notice effect is executed halfway does not occur. It is possible to improve the interest of

  Note that the execution ratio of the continuous notice effect with a relatively long (relatively) performance period (time) during the 1 variation effect in the high / low accuracy short-time game state is 0%. It may be executed if the rate is lower than the execution rate of the continuous notice effect (specifically, the prefetch zone effect or the continuous step-up notice effect) with a short effect period (time). Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  As a sixth feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, a big hit is made depending on the type of color in the high-probability / low-probability short-time game state than the ratio of notifying the degree of expectation which is a big win depending on the type of color in the normal game state. The point that the ratio of predicting the degree of expectation is high. In this way, the player can intuitively grasp the contents of the notice even in the high / low-probability short-time game state in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shortened, and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

(Pre-read zone production mode determination process of production control board)
The prefetch zone effect mode determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-14-1, the sub CPU 102a obtains a pre-read zone effect scenario determination random number, and in step S1303-14-2, a pre-read zone effect scenario determination table for performing pre-read zone effect scenario determination (see FIG. 41). ) Is selected, and the pre-read zone effect scenario is determined by comparing the pre-determination result specified by the start opening winning designation command with a pre-read zone effect scenario determination random number or the like.

  The pre-read zone effect scenario means the contents of the effect of the zone turn effect and the pre-read zone effect. The production contents of the zone production effect and the look-ahead zone production include whether or not the production effect is executed, the timing when the production production is executed, the type of the production production executed, the execution of the pre-read zone production The timing at which the prefetch zone effect is executed when the prefetch zone is executed is included.

  The look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 41 is associated with the prior determination result and the current first special figure hold number (U1) indicated by the start port winning designation command that is the target of the start port winning process. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the pre-read zone effect determination table, the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command that is the target of the start opening winning process stored in the sub RAM 102c and the sub RAM 102c Reference is made to the number of first start opening winning designation commands stored in one production information hold storage area (first storage unit to fourth storage unit), that is, the first special figure hold number (U1).

  For the first special figure reservation number (U1) in the prefetch zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 41, the start opening winning time process in step S1303 is executed prior to the hold information update process in step S1305. The number of holdings that is one less than the actual first special figure holding number (U1) is defined.

  In addition, in each pre-read zone effect scenario determination table associated with the prior determination result and the number of first special figure reservation (U1), the pre-read zone effect scenario determination value and the selection rate (%) for each scenario, A pre-read zone effect scenario is stored in association with each other.

  Further, “the change”, “before 1 change”, “before 2 change”, and “before 3 change” described in the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table are pre-read zone effect, turn success effect, turn failure effect 1 or The timing at which the roll failure production 2 is executed is shown. Here, “the change” in the present embodiment represents a change display (hereinafter referred to as “the change”) of a special symbol corresponding to the start port winning designation command related to the process at the time of the start port winning. "Represents the change display of the special symbol one before the change is made," 2 before change "shows the change display of the special symbol two times before the change is made, and" 3 before change "is The change display of the special symbol three times before that change is performed is shown.

  In step S1303-14-3, the sub CPU 102a acquires a final number determination random number in order to determine the final number of persons related to the zone sign effect icon (hereinafter simply referred to as “the final number”), and step S1303-14. -4, the final number determination table (see FIG. 42) for determining the final number is selected, and the final number and the final number are associated with each other by comparing the pre-read zone effect scenario with the final number determination random number. Foreplay effect scenario determination TBL. No is determined.

  The final number of people is the number of people who make up the icon used for the zone sign production, and means the number of people who finally reach. The “final” is because the direction of the zone warning effect, in other words, the number of people making up the icon used for the zone warning effect (the display mode of the icon) can change midway. is there. In this embodiment, the final number of people is set to four types of 1, 3, 5, and 7. This “one” corresponds to the second special mode, and “three” is the first. Corresponding to 3 special modes 1, “5” corresponds to the 3rd special mode 2, and “7” corresponds to the 3rd special mode 3. In other words, determining the final number of people can also mean determining the final icon display mode for the zone sign effect.

  The final number determination table shown in FIG. 42 is associated with the prefetch zone effect scenario determined in the prefetch zone effect scenario determination. In each final number determination table associated with the pre-read zone effect scenario, the final number determination value and the final number are stored in association with each other so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 42 is obtained. Therefore, when selecting the final number determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the prefetch zone effect scenario indicated by the prefetch zone effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c.

  The “precursor effect scenario determination TBL.No” described in the final number determination table is identification information of a predictor effect scenario determination table used in zone predictor effect scenario determination to be described later. The determination result of the pre-read zone effect scenario determination and the determination result of the final number determination are associated with each other. Therefore, the final number determination determines the final number of people, and also determines the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the zone precursor effect scenario determination.

  In step S1303-14-5, the sub CPU 102a acquires a zone precursor effect scenario determination random number in order to determine the zone precursor effect scenario, and in step S1303-14-6, the zone for performing the zone precursor effect scenario determination The precursor effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 43) is selected, and the precursor effect scenario determination TBL. The zone precursor effect scenario is determined by comparing No with a random number for determining the zone precursor effect scenario.

  The zone sign production scenario means the production contents of the zone sign production. In the contents of the zone warning effect, whether or not the zone warning effect can be executed and the icon display mode when the zone warning effect is executed is either the second special mode or the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3. The change timing and the icon display mode after the change when changing (the number of persons constituting the icon) are included.

  As described above, the zone sign effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 43 includes the sign effect scenario determination TBL. In which the determination result of the pre-read zone effect scenario determination and the determination result of the final number determination in the start-up winning prize process are associated with each other. Associated with No. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the zone sign effect scenario determination table, the sign effect scenario determination TBL. Derived as the determination result of the final number determination in step S1303-14-4. Refer to No.

  “At the time of winning”, “before 3 changes → before 2 changes”, and “before 2 changes → 1 change before” described in the zone sign effect scenario determination table are timings corresponding to the number of persons constituting the icon related to the zone sign effect. Represents. Here, “at the time of winning” represents the time when a special figure hold corresponding to the start opening winning designation command related to the start opening winning time process occurs, and “before 3 changes → before 2 changes”, the change is performed. This represents the period from when the change display of the 3rd special symbol ends to when the change display of the 2nd special symbol starts (when the hold icon is shifted). This represents a period from when the change display of the second special symbol in which the change is made ends to when the change display of the previous special symbol is started (when the hold icon is shifted).

  In FIG. 43, “when winning”, “before 3 changes → before 2 changes”, and “before 2 changes → before 1 change” are provided as the timing of the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone sign effect. In this embodiment, the timing at which the number of persons constituting the icon related to the zone sign effect changes is “at the time of winning”, “before 4 changes → before 3 changes” and “before 3 changes → before 2 changes”. And “2 changes before 1 change”, and the zone precursor effect scenario determination table used when the zone precursor effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 43 is the first special figure hold number “3”. This is because only “at the time of winning”, “before 3 changes → before 2 changes”, and “before 2 changes → before 1 change” can occur.

  In the zone precursor effect scenario determination table used in the case of the first special figure hold number “4”, “when winning”, “before four changes → In the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the case of “before 3 changes”, “before 3 changes → 2 before changes”, and “before 2 changes → 1 change before” and the number of first special figure hold “2”, As the timing at which the number of icons constituting the sign effect changes, “when winning a prize” and “before 2 changes → 1 change before” are set, and the sign effect scenario used when the first special figure hold number is “1” In the determination table, “at the time of winning” is set as the timing at which the number of persons constituting the icon related to the zone sign effect changes.

  Also, in FIG. 43, the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” described below the column of the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes are as follows: It shows that the icon changes to a display mode composed of the number of persons.

  Therefore, for example, in the indication effect scenario 17-1, the display mode of the hold icon generated at the time of winning a prize and the display mode of the icon displayed at that time is a display mode (second special mode) consisting of the number of people “1”, and “3 In “before change → before 2 change”, the display mode of the icon displayed at that time is the display mode (third special mode 1) consisting of the number of people “3”, and in “before 2 change → before 1 change” The display content of the zone sign effect which becomes the display mode (third special mode 2) in which the display mode of the icon displayed at that time is the number of persons “5” is shown.

  In step S1303-14-7, the sub CPU 102a subtracts the pre-read zone effect execution information indicating the pre-read zone effect scenario that is the determination result of the pre-read zone effect scenario determination and the zone predictor effect scenario that is the determination result of the zone predictor effect scenario determination. It is set (stored) in the continuous notice effect execution information area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in the RAM 102c.

  In step S1303-14-8, the sub CPU 102a subtracts a prefetch zone effect control command indicating the prefetch zone effect scenario that is the determination result of the prefetch zone effect scenario determination and the zone predictor effect scenario that is the determination result of the zone predictor effect scenario determination. Set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 102c.

  The prefetch zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the prefetch zone effect control command, the zone sign effect is produced according to the zone precursor effect scenario and the effect content (effect mode) indicated by the prefetch zone effect scenario indicated by the prefetch zone effect control command. In addition, it controls (executes) the zone turning effect and the prefetch zone effect.

  In step S <b> 1303-14-9, the sub CPU 102 a acquires an icon display mode scenario determination random number for determining an icon display mode scenario for executing the prefetch zone effect or the zone precursor effect.

  In step S1303-14-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the pre-read zone effect scenario determination is a pre-read zone effect scenario including execution of the pre-read zone effect, in other words, related to the start opening winning time process. It is determined whether or not to execute the prefetch zone effect based on the start opening prize designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the pre-read zone effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1303-14-11, and the pre-read zone effect is not executed, but the zone-reading effect is executed (hereinafter, the pre-read zone effect is not executed, but the zone-reading effect is not executed). If it is determined that execution of the production is “gase zone production production”), the process proceeds to step S1303-14-12.

  In step S1303-14-11, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 44) for prefetch zone effect execution for determining an icon display mode scenario when executing the prefetch zone effect. Icon display mode scenario determination for determining an icon display mode scenario is performed by collating icon display mode scenario determination random numbers.

  The icon display mode scenario determination table for execution of the pre-read zone effect shown in FIG. 44 is a predictive effect scenario in which the determination result of the pre-read zone effect scenario determination and the determination result of the final number determination in the start-up winning prize process are associated with each other. It is provided for each. Therefore, the sub CPU 102a refers to the sign effect scenario indicated by the sign effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c when selecting the icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the prefetch zone effect.

  Each icon display mode scenario determination table provided for each precursor effect scenario has a plurality of icon display mode scenarios, and an icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately assigned to each icon display mode scenario. ing.

  In addition, “at the time of winning”, “before 2 changes”, “before 1 change”, and “the change” described in the icon display mode scenario determination table for executing the pre-read zone effect indicate timings at which the icon display mode changes. Represents. As described above, when the prefetch zone effect is being executed, the display mode of the displayed zone effect target icon is the third special mode 3, and the display mode of the zone effect non-target icon is the third special mode 6. .

  Further, even if the pre-read zone effect is not executed, the zone effect target icon becomes the second special mode or the third special mode 1 or 2 as the zone sign effect before the pre-read zone effect is executed. The non-target icon becomes the second special mode or the third special mode 4, 5. And when the icon of the 2nd special mode or the 3rd special mode containing a person's silhouette is displayed in this way, the silhouette of the person who constitutes the icon (the main silhouette part for the 3rd special mode) The color can change.

  For example, “white → green” of “1 change before” in the icon display mode scenario “5” in FIG. 44 is the silhouette of the person who constitutes the icon displayed in white (the main silhouette portion for the third special mode) Indicates that the color changes to green.

  In addition, “white → green → red → zebra → rainbow” of “the change” in the icon display mode scenario “15” in FIG. 44 is the silhouette of the person who constitutes the icon displayed in white (about the third special mode). Indicates that the color of the main silhouette part) changes stepwise from green to red to zebra pattern to rainbow.

  In addition, the change of the color of the person's silhouette (the main silhouette portion for the third special mode) constituting the icon is appropriately performed according to the contents of the effect of the changing effect being performed at that time. As the contents of the fluctuating effects for changing the color of the silhouette of the person, the pseudo-continuous effects can be temporarily stopped or re-varied, or one or more times during a fluctuating effect depending on the expectation of winning the jackpot. A predetermined cut-in that causes the image display device 14 to display a cut-in image corresponding to the degree of expectation of winning a big hit at the time of step-up of a so-called step-up notice for stepping up a predetermined effect (effect image, effect sound, etc.) step by step Execution of advance production that develops dialogue advance, character appearance, or super-reach production that causes speech output from the voice output device 15 while displaying a speech image corresponding to the expectation degree of the advance notice and jackpot winning on the image display device 14 When the reach state is established, a predetermined operation effect by the effect accessory device 17 is set as appropriate according to the changing effect at that time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the color of the person's silhouette (the main silhouette portion for the third special mode) constituting the icon related to the icon display mode scenario for executing the prefetch zone effect changes is the present embodiment. The present invention is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate, for example, when the icon shifts when the predetermined variation effect ends and the next variation effect starts.

  In step S <b> 1303-14-12, the sub CPU 102 a selects an icon display mode scenario determination table (not shown) for executing a gaze zone turning effect for determining an icon display mode scenario in the case of executing the gaze zone turning effect, and displays an icon. Icon display mode scenario determination is performed to determine an icon display mode scenario by collating display mode scenario determination random numbers.

  In step S1303-14-13, the sub CPU 102a displays the icon display mode scenario determined in step S1303-14-11 or step S1303-14-12 in the same manner as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in the sub RAM 102c. It memorize | stores in the icon display mode scenario area | region of a memory | storage part, and complete | finishes this prefetch zone effect mode determination process.

(Continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process for effect control board)
The continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-15-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining a continuous step-up notice effect scenario, and in step S1303-15-2, obtains a continuous step-up notice effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 46A). Select and specify the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening prize designation command, the number of special figure hold corresponding to the type of special symbol to be notified (first special figure hold number or second special figure hold number), and continuous A step-up notice effect scenario is determined by collating random numbers for determining a step-up notice effect scenario. The continuous step-up notice effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The continuous step-up notice effect scenario means the contents of the effect of the step-up notice effect (effect mode), the timing when the various step effects constituting each stage of the continuous step-up notice effect are executed, and the step effect executed This indicates the type.

  In step S1303-15-3, the sub CPU 102a performs continuous step-up notice effect execution information indicating a continuous step-up notice effect scenario in the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in the sub RAM 102c. Set (store) in the information storage area.

  In step S1303-15-4, the sub CPU 102a sets a continuous step up notice effect control command indicating a continuous step up notice effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the continuous step up notice effect mode determination process.

  The continuous step-up notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the continuous step-up notice effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 continuously follow the effect contents (effect mode) corresponding to the continuous step-up notice effect scenario indicated by the continuous step-up notice effect control command. Control (execute) the step-up notice effect.

(Continuous step-up notice effect scenario judgment table)
FIG. 46A shows a continuous step-up notice effect scenario determination table.

  The continuous step-up notice effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 46 (a) includes a pre-determination result specified by the start opening prize designation command, a special figure hold number corresponding to the type of special symbol to be notified, and a continuous The selection rate (%) based on random numbers for determining the step-up notice effect scenario, the continuous step-up notice effect scenario No. to be selected, and the contents of the effect (effect form) corresponding to the scenario are uniquely associated and stored. Yes.

  In addition, “blue tint (SU1)” in the column of the content of the effect (effect mode) means that the movable part 17A of the effect accessory device 17 is located in front of the image display device 14 as the first first step effect. While performing an effect operation that moves to the effect position (movement width: small), a plurality of LEDs provided inside emit light in blue, and a blue effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14. Means that.

  Further, “greening (SU2)” means that the movable part 17A of the effect accessory device 17 moves to the second effect position (movement width: middle) located in front of the image display device 14 as the second step effect. This means that a plurality of LEDs provided inside emit light in green while performing a rendering operation, and a green effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

  Further, “redness (SU3)” means that the movable part 17A of the effect accessory device 17 moves to the third effect position (movement width: large) located in front of the image display device 14 as a third step effect. This means that a plurality of LEDs provided inside emit light in red while performing a rendering operation, and a red effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

  “Rainbow (SU4)” refers to the third effect position (movement width: large) where the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 is located in front of the image display device 14 as the final fourth step effect. It means that a plurality of LEDs provided inside emit light in rainbow while performing a moving effect operation, and an rainbow effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

  The expectation of jackpot for each step production is “blue roaring (SU1)” <“green roaring (SU2)” <“red roaring (SU3)” <“rainbow roaring (SU4)”. In the notice effect, it is confirmed that the fluctuating effect more than the SP reach effect will be executed when stepping up (advancing) to “Red Rim (SU3)”, and fluctuating effect when stepping up to “Rainbow (SU4)” It is determined that the result of However, “Rainbow (SU4)” appears only with this change in order to maintain the player's expectation.

(Chance eye notice effect mode determination process of effect control board)
With reference to FIG. 45B, the chance eye notice effect mode determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1303-16-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the chance eye notice effect scenario, and in step S1303-16-2, selects the chance eye notice effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 46B). , The preliminary determination result specified by the start opening prize designation command, the number of special figure holdings corresponding to the type of special symbol to be notified (the number of first special figure holdings or the number of second special figure holdings), and the chance eye notice The chance eye notice effect scenario is determined by collating random numbers for determining the effect scenario. The chance eye notice effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The chance eye notice effect scenario means the contents of the chance eye notice effect (effect mode), and indicates the timing at which various chance items constituting the chance eye notice effect are stopped and displayed, and the type of chance item to be stopped and displayed. Is.

  In step S1303-16-3, the sub CPU 102a stores the chance eye notice effect execution information indicating the chance eye notice effect scenario in the continuous notice execution information storage in the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command in the sub RAM 102c. Set (store) in the area.

  In step S1303-16-4, the sub CPU 102a sets a chance eye notice effect control command indicating a chance eye notice effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the chance eye notice effect mode determination process.

  The chance eye notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the chance eye notice effect control command, the chance eye notice effect is produced according to the effect content (effect mode) corresponding to the chance eye notice effect scenario indicated by the chance eye notice effect control command. Is controlled (executed).

(Chance eye notice effect scenario judgment table)
FIG. 46B shows a chance eye notice effect scenario determination table.

  In the chance eye notice effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 46 (b), the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening prize designation command, the number of special figure holds corresponding to the type of special symbol to be noticed, the chance eye The selection rate (%) based on the random number for determining the notice effect scenario, the chance chance notice effect scenario No. to be selected, and the contents of the effect (effect mode) corresponding to the scenario are uniquely associated and stored.

  Note that “blue symbol” in the column of effect content (effect mode) means that a combination of effect symbols whose color is set to blue is stopped and displayed as a chance. “Green design” means that a combination of performance symbols whose color is set to green as an opportunity is stopped and displayed. “Red design” means that a combination of effect designs whose color is set to red as a chance eye is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the big hit expectation degree of each chance is “blue symbol” <“green symbol” <“red symbol”, and more than SP reach production when “red symbol” is stopped and displayed in the chance eye notice effect. It is determined that the fluctuating effect is executed. It should be noted that in the chance eye notice effect, there is no chance eye for determining the jackpot, but a chance eye for determining the jackpot may be provided.

(Processing for determining the dialog notice effect on the effect control board)
With reference to FIG. 47 (a), the speech notice effect mode determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1303-17-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the serif notice effect scenario, and in step S1303-17-2, selects the serif notice effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 48A) and starts the process. Pre-judgment results specified by the winning prize designation command, the number of special figure reservations corresponding to the type of special symbol subject to notice (the number of first special figure hold or the number of second special figure hold), and serif notice effect scenario determination A dialogue notice effect scenario is determined by collating random numbers. The serif notice effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The serif notice effect scenario means an effect content (effect mode) of the serif notice effect, and indicates a timing at which various serif effects constituting the serif notice effect are executed, and a type of the serif effect to be executed.

  In step S1303-17-3, the sub CPU 102a stores the serif notice effect execution information indicating the serif notice effect scenario in the continuous notice execution information storage area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command of the sub RAM 102c. Set (memorize).

  In step S1303-17-4, the sub CPU 102a sets a serif notice effect control command indicating a serif notice effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the present serif notice effect mode determination process.

  The serif notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the serif notice effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 control (execute) the serif notice effect according to the effect contents (effect mode) indicated by the serif notice effect scenario indicated by the serif notice effect control command. To do.

(Serif notice effect scenario judgment table)
FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a serif notice effect scenario determination table.

  In the serif notice effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 (a), the advance judgment result specified by the start opening prize designation command, the number of special figure reservations corresponding to the type of special symbol to be noticed, and the serif notice effect The selection rate (%) based on the random number for scenario determination, the selected line notice effect scenario No., and the effect content (effect mode) corresponding to the scenario are uniquely associated and stored.

  In addition, “Maybe”, “That?”, “Ne ~~”, “What is this!” And “No!” In the column of the contents of the production (production mode) indicate the player's sense of expectation (expectation) ) Means a line displayed in black on the image display device 14.

  Further, “reach?” Means a line displayed in black on the image display device 14 in order to suggest that there is a possibility that the SP reach effect or more may be executed. “Reach!” Means a line displayed in black on the image display device 14 to suggest execution of reach production.

  “Hot!” Means a line displayed in red on the image display device 14 in order to suggest that the expectation of the jackpot is high. “Intense heat!” Means a line displayed in gold on the image display device 14 to suggest that the expectation of jackpot is quite high. “Confirm!” Means a line displayed in rainbow characters on the image display device 14 to suggest the occurrence of a jackpot.

  In addition, the expectation of jackpot of each line is “black letters” <“red letters” <“gold letters” <“rainbow letters”, and “red letters” and “gold letters” are displayed in the dialogue preview. At that time, it is determined that the variation effect more than the SP reach effect is executed, and it is determined that the result of the variation effect is a big hit when the “rainbow character” line is displayed. However, “red letters”, “gold letters”, and “rainbow letters” are displayed only in the relevant fluctuations in order to maintain the player's expectation.

(Processing for determining the effect notice effect on the effect control board)
With reference to FIG. 47 (b), the effect notice effect mode determination processing of the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1303-18-1, the sub CPU 102a obtains a random number for effect notice effect scenario determination, and in step S1303-18-2, an effect notice effect scenario determination table (FIG. b) See)), and the special determination hold number (first special figure hold number or second special figure hold number) corresponding to the pre-determination result specified by the start opening prize designation command and the type of special symbol to be notified Number) and an effect notice effect scenario determining random number or the like are determined to determine an effect notice effect scenario. The effect notice effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The effect notice effect scenario means the effect contents (effect mode) of the effect notice effect, and indicates the timing at which the change start effect image of the effect symbol constituting the effect notice effect is displayed and the type of the effect image.

  In step S1303-18-3, the sub CPU 102a stores effect notice effect execution information indicating the effect notice effect scenario in the continuous notice execution information storage area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning designation command of the sub RAM 102c. Set (memorize).

  In step S1303-18-4, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect notice effect control command indicating an effect notice effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the effect notice effect mode determining process.

  The effect notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect notice effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 control (execute) the effect notice effect according to the effect contents (effect mode) according to the effect notice effect scenario indicated by the effect notice effect control command. )

(Effect notice effect scenario judgment table)
FIG. 48B is a diagram showing an effect notice effect scenario determination table.

  In the effect advance notice effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 (b), the advance determination result specified by the start opening prize designation command, the number of special figure holds corresponding to the type of special symbol to be notified, and the effect notice effect The selection rate (%) based on the scenario determination random number, the effect notice effect scenario No. to be selected, and the effect content (effect mode) corresponding to the scenario are uniquely associated and stored.

  Note that “blue effect” in the column of effect content (effect mode) means that a blue effect image is displayed so as to surround the effect symbol at the start of variable display of the effect symbol on the image display device 14. means. “Green effect” means that a green effect image is displayed so as to surround the effect symbol at the start of the variation display of the effect symbol on the image display device 14.

  The “red effect” means that a red effect image is displayed so as to surround the effect symbol at the start of the variation display of the effect symbol on the image display device 14. The “rainbow effect” means that an rainbow effect image is displayed so as to surround the effect symbol at the start of the variation display of the effect symbol on the image display device 14.

  The expectation level of each effect image is “blue effect” <“green effect” <“red effect” <“rainbow effect”, and SP reach when the “red effect” occurs in the effect notice effect. The execution of the variable production more than the production is confirmed, and when the “rainbow effect” occurs, the jackpot of the variation production is decided. However, the “rainbow effect” occurs only in the fluctuation in order to maintain the player's expectation.

  In the present embodiment, when the continuous notice effect is generated, the reach effect or more is determined by the change. However, when the continuous notice effect is executed with the variable display for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times), More than reach production may be confirmed by variation, or more than SP reach production may be confirmed. In addition, the continuous notice effect is executed only in a situation where it is determined that a plurality of variable effects will be executed, but the continuous notice effect is executed even in a situation where only one change effect (the change) is executed. You may be made to do.

(Production control board icon change notice determination process)
The icon change notice determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-1, the sub CPU 102a is currently in the icon change notice prohibition period, specifically, during the jackpot game, during the SP / SPSP reach production, for a predetermined time after the start of the special symbol variation display (for example, 3 seconds), a period before a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, or an effect that changes the icon display mode has already been executed or has already been executed. Determine whether it is scheduled to do. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the icon change notice period, it moves the process to step S1303-19-5, and if it determines that it is not the icon change notice period, it moves the process to step S1303-19-2.

  In step S1303-19-2, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for icon change notice execution determination, and in step S1303-19-3, determines whether or not the icon change notice is executed and the type of icon change notice to be executed. Icon change notice determination table (see FIG. 50) is selected, and the icon change notice is checked by collating the effect mode, the pre-determined result specified by the start opening winning designation command, the icon change notice execution determination random number, and the like. An icon change notice determination process for performing the determination is performed. Details of the icon change notice determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the icon change notice determination process is non-execution of the icon change notice. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the icon change notice is not executed, the process proceeds to step S1303-19-5, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the icon change notice is not executed, the process proceeds to step S1303-19-6.

  In step S <b> 1303-19-5, the sub CPU 102 a determines an icon display mode scenario for no icon change notice to display the icon in a normal mode until the variation effect ends, and step S <b> 1303-19-22. Move processing to.

  In step S <b> 1303-19-6, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not the result of the icon change notice determination process is execution of a normal change notice without a change effect (action effect) by a predetermined character. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the normal change notice is to be executed, it moves the process to step S1303-19-7, and if it determines that the normal change notice is not to be executed, it moves the process to step S1303-19-10.

  In step S1303-19-7, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the final display mode for normal change notification in step S1303-19-7, and in step S1303-19-8, the normal change notification is made according to the current gaming state (effect mode). Icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and a pre-determination result specified by the start opening prize designation command and the number of special figure hold corresponding to the type of special symbol to be notified ( (The first special figure hold number or the second special figure hold number) and the icon final display mode determination random number and the like, and the final display mode of the icon, which is the final display mode of the icon, and a normal change notice described later Icon display mode scenario determination TBL. Used for selecting the icon display mode scenario determination table. No is determined. The icon final display mode determination table for normal change notice will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1303-19-9, the sub CPU 102a selects a normal change notice icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 53), and performs icon display mode scenario determination TBL. An icon display mode scenario for normal change notice is determined by collating No or the like, and the process proceeds to step S1303-19-22. The icon display mode scenario determination table for normal change notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 1303-19-10, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not the result of the icon change notice determination process is execution of a throwing kiss notice. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the throwing kiss notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1303-19-11. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the throwing kiss notice is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1303-19-14.

  The throwing kiss notice is composed of a pending icon change notice and / or a changing icon change notice, and the icon display mode is changed by the throwing kiss character (the action of skipping the heart), and the jackpot corresponding to the icon is displayed. This is a notice effect of whether or not to improve the expectation degree of jackpot winning of determination (special symbol lottery) (so-called whether or not to increase the chance), and is a kind of pre-read notice effect that is performed based on the result of prior determination. In the throwing kiss notice, since the action effect (change effect) acting on the icon is performed by the throwing kiss character, it can be said that the effect is longer in the effect period (time) than the normal change notice.

  In step S1303-19-11, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the final display mode of the icon for throwing kiss notice, and in step S1303-19-12, gives a throw kiss notice in accordance with the current gaming state (effect mode). Icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 51) for use, the preliminary determination result specified by the start opening prize designation command, the first special figure hold number corresponding to the first special symbol, and the icon final display mode The icon display mode scenario determination TBL. Used for selecting the icon final display mode, which is the final display mode of the icons by collating the random numbers for determination, and the icon display mode scenario determination table for throwing kiss notice described later. No is determined. The icon final display mode determination table for throwing kiss notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-13, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 54) for throwing kiss notice, and performs icon display mode scenario determination TBL. By collating No or the like, the icon display mode scenario for throwing kiss notice is determined, and the process proceeds to step S1303-19-22. The icon display mode scenario determination table for throwing kiss notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-14, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the icon change notice determination process is execution of a handshake meeting notice. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the handshake meeting advance notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1303-19-15, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the handshake meeting advance notice is not to be executed, the icon change notice determination process ends.

  The handshake meeting notice is composed of a pending icon change notice and a changing icon change notice, and a handshake appearing in the vicinity of the handshake meeting hero and the changing icon display area 142, which are the icons subject to notice displayed in the fourth special mode 1. The chance to win a jackpot decision (special symbol drawing) corresponding to the icon by gradually changing the display style (color) of the hero of the handshake meeting, triggered by the appearance of a specific line while shaking hands with the party character This is a notice effect of whether to improve the degree (so-called chance increase), and is a kind of pre-read notice effect that is performed based on the result of prior determination. In the handshake meeting notice, since the action effect (change effect) that acts on the protagonist hero (the changing icon) is performed by the handshake event character, it can be said that the effect is longer in the effect period (time) than the normal change notice.

  In addition, it does not necessarily mean that the display mode (color) of the main character of the handshake meeting will change just because a certain line has appeared in the handshake event notice, but the display mode (color) of the main character of the handshake meeting will change completely. In some cases, the change in the display mode (color) is successful, and in the middle of the change in the display mode (color), the display mode is changed back to the original display mode.

  In addition, the number of times a line appears in one handshake meeting notice (hereinafter referred to as “the number of lines”) is set in plural. In the present embodiment, the number of lines is set to four types of 1 to 4.

  In addition, a handshake meeting notice suggestion effect is provided in relation to the handshake meeting notice. The handshake meeting notice suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the handshake meeting notice is executed. For the handshake event notice suggestion effect, the hold icon for the handshake event notice is displayed in the 4th special for the execution of the handshake event notice until the start of the handshake event notice. In addition to displaying in the mode 2, the handshake meeting notice non-target changing icon is displayed in the fourth special form 3, and the handshake meeting notice non-target hold icon is displayed in the fourth special form 4.

  In step S1303-19-15, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the final display mode of the icon for handshake meeting announcement, and in step S1303-19-16, the final display mode determination table for the final icon of the handshake meeting (FIG. 55). By referring to the preliminary determination result specified by the start opening winning designation command, the first special figure holding number corresponding to the first special symbol, the icon final display mode determination random number, etc. An icon final display mode which is a final display mode and a final color pattern which will be described later are determined. The icon final display mode determination table for handshake meeting notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-17, the sub CPU 102a obtains a line number determination random number. In step S1303-19-18, the sub CPU 102a selects a line number determination table (see FIG. 56) for determining the number of lines. The number of lines for the handshake meeting notice is determined by comparing the color pattern with a random number for determining the number of lines. The dialogue count determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-19, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table (see FIG. 57) for handshake meeting notice, and compares the final color pattern with the number of lines for handshake meeting notice. The icon display mode scenario determination table No. is determined. The icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for handshake meeting notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-20, the sub CPU 102a obtains a random number for icon display mode scenario determination for handshake meeting notice, and in step S1303-19-21, an icon display form scenario determination table for handshake meeting notice (FIG. 58). The icon display mode scenario for notifying the handshake meeting is determined by comparing a random number for determining the icon display mode scenario for determining the handshake meeting and the like. The icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake meeting notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-22, the sub CPU 102a determines the icon display mode scenario determined by the processing of step S1303-19-5, step S1303-19-9, step S1303-19-13, step S1303-19-21, and the like. Is stored in the icon display mode scenario area of the sub-RAM 102c, and the icon change notice determination process is terminated.

◆ (Icon change notice judgment table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an icon change notice determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to perform icon change notice and the type of icon change notice to be executed.

  In the icon change notice determination table shown in FIG. 50, an effect mode (game state), a pre-judgment result specified by a start opening prize designation command, a selection rate (%) based on a random number for icon change notice execution determination, and selection The type of icon change notice to be stored is uniquely associated and stored.

  As a first feature of the icon change notice determination table shown in FIG. 50, in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), a normal change notice (normal hold change effect) without an action effect (change effect) and a throw with an action effect. While the three types of kiss notice and handshake meeting notice (special hold change effect) are set to be executed, in the high / low-accuracy short game state (effect modes B and C), the throw kiss notice and handshake It is pointed out that only the normal change notice is executed without the notice of the meeting. As a result, the performance time of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake meeting notice cannot be secured sufficiently in the high / low-probability short-time game state in which the variation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal game state, and the production effect is reduced. Can be prevented, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that at least one of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake meeting notice is executed at a rate lower than the execution rate in the normal gaming state (effect mode A) in the high-probability / low-accuracy short-time game state (effect modes B and C). Also good. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, at least one of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake meeting notice may be executed at a rate lower than the execution rate in the normal gaming state only in one of the high-probability short-time gaming state and the low-probability time-short gaming state. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, when at least one of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake meeting notice is executed in at least one of the high-probability short-time gaming state and the low-probability short-time gaming state, the fluctuation time tends to be long because there is no waiting change display. It may be executed for the changing icon only during the change display (change effect) of the second special symbol executed with the special figure holding number “0”. In this way, it is possible to secure the performance time of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake meeting notice, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability / low-probability short-time game state.

  Further, when at least one of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake meeting notice is executed in the high-accuracy short-time gaming state and the low-accuracy short-time gaming state, the execution ratio is different between the high-accuracy short-time gaming state and the low-accuracy short-time gaming state ( For example, high accuracy time short> low accuracy time short, high accuracy time short <low accuracy time short). If it does in this way, it will become difficult for a player to get bored by the execution mode of the icon change notice for every game state, and it will become possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when a throwing kiss notice or a handshake event notice (special hold change effect) is executed in a high-accuracy short-time game state or a low-accuracy short-time game state, an effect mode (direction time is short or appears) different from the normal game state Or a different type of special hold change effect (shorter production time) than the normal game state in the high-probability short-time game state or the low-probability short-time game state, The character that appears and the movement thereof may be different). Further, different types of special hold change effects may be executed in the normal gaming state, the high-probability short-time gaming state, and the low-probability short-time gaming state.

  The second feature of the icon change notice determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the game state (progress mode B, C) has a higher / lower accuracy than the rate at which the normal change notice is executed in the normal game state (effect mode A). The point that the normal change notice is executed is high. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability / low-probability short-time game state in which the variation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal game state (the reach effect is less likely to occur).

  It should be noted that the rate at which the normal change notice is executed between the high-probability short-time gaming state and the low-probability short-time gaming state may be different while maintaining a higher value than the normal gaming state. It becomes possible to play.

  In addition, the normal change notice, throwing kiss notice and handshake meeting notice execution rate in the normal gaming state are the same, but the throwing kiss notice and handshake meeting notice execution rate will be higher than the normal change notice execution rate. Alternatively, the execution ratio of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake meeting notice may be different. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest of the game in the normal game state in which the variation time tends to be longer than in the high-probability / low-probability short-time game state.

  In the present embodiment, for the icon change notice (throw kiss notice, handshake meeting notice) accompanied by the action effect (change effect), the action effect (change effect) is performed during one change display. The effect presentation may be performed over the display, or both the icon change notice for performing the action effect during one variation display and the icon change notice for performing the effect over a plurality of variation displays may be executed. May be.

  In that case, it is preferable to set the execution ratio in the high-probability / low-probability short-time game state lower than the normal game state for the icon change notice in which the action effect (change effect) is executed during one variation display. In addition, for the icon change notice for executing the change effect over a plurality of variation displays, the execution ratio in the normal gaming state and the high-probability / low-probability short-time gaming state may be the same, or the high-probability / low-probability short-time game The execution ratio in the normal gaming state may be higher than the state, or the execution ratio in the high / low probability short-time gaming state may be higher than in the normal gaming state.

(Final display mode determination table for normal change notice during normal gaming state)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table for a normal change notice in the normal gaming state. Note that FIG. 51 also serves as an icon final display mode determination table for throwing kiss notice.

  In the normal change notice icon final display mode determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 51, the preliminary determination result specified by the start opening winning designation command, the current number of first special figure hold, and the normal change Icon final display mode determination random number selection rate (%), selected normal change icon final display mode type (seven types), icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No is uniquely associated and stored.

  Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a determines the icon final display mode determination for the normal change notice, the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command which is the target of the start opening winning process stored in the sub RAM 102c. In addition, the number of first start opening winning designation commands stored in the first effect information holding storage area of the sub RAM 102c is referred to.

(Final icon display table for normal change notice during short-time gaming state)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table for a normal change notice during the (high / low) short-time gaming state.

  In the icon final display mode determination table for normal change notice in the short-time gaming state shown in FIG. 52, the preliminary determination result specified by the start opening winning designation command, the current second special figure holding number, and the normal change Icon final display mode determination random number selection rate (%), selected normal change icon final display mode type (5 types less than in the normal gaming state), icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No is uniquely associated and stored.

  Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a determines the icon final display mode determination for the normal change notice, the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning designation command which is the target of the start opening winning process stored in the sub RAM 102c. In addition, the number of second start opening winning designation commands stored in the second effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c is referred to.

  The first feature of the normal change notice icon final display mode determination table in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 51 is that the icon is more iconic than the normal change icon final display mode determination table in the short-time gaming state shown in FIG. The point that the kind of final display mode is increasing is mentioned. In this way, the player is less likely to get bored with the normal change notice in the normal game state where the stay period is likely to be longer than in the short-time game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The first feature of the normal change notice icon final display mode determination table in the short-time gaming state shown in FIG. 52 is that the icon is more iconic than the normal change icon final display mode determination table in the normal game state shown in FIG. Although the types of the final display mode are reduced, the display mode is that the prior determination result is notified to the player more specifically (the player can easily grasp the notification content immediately). By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the notice contents of the normal change notice in the short-time game state in which the variation time tends to be shorter than in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When the second special mode 22 (extreme heat) is selected as the icon final display mode, a reach effect with a specific effect symbol (for example, “7”) is generated in the target variable effect. May be. In this way, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's expectation for the type of the final display mode of the icon, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Icon display mode scenario judgment table for normal change notice in normal gaming state)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a normal change notice icon display mode scenario determination table in the normal gaming state.

  In the normal change notice icon final display mode determination table in the normal game state shown in FIG. 53, the normal change notice icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No, the icon display mode scenario for the normal change notice to be selected and the production contents of the icon display mode scenario for the normal change notice are uniquely associated, and as a remark, the icon final display form and the first start opening winning designation command Stores the specified prejudgment results.

  “On winning”, “before 2 changes → before 1 change”, “before 1 change”, “before 1 change → the change”, and “the change” Represents the timing at which the icon display mode changes.

  For example, in the normal change notice icon display mode scenario “70”, the hold icon of the second special mode is displayed at the time of winning a prize, and the change display of the special symbol two times before the change ends and the previous one changes. When the change display of the special symbol is started, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the second special mode 11 and the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the second special display in the previous special symbol change display. When the change is changed to the special mode 12 and the change display of the immediately preceding special symbol is finished and the change is started, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the second special mode 13.

(Icon display mode scenario judgment table for throwing kiss notice in normal gaming state)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of an icon display mode scenario determination table for throwing kiss notice in the normal gaming state.

  The icon display mode scenario determination table for throwing kiss warning in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 54 includes the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No, the icon display mode scenario for throwing kiss notice selected at a predetermined selection rate, the production contents of the icon display mode scenario for throwing kiss notice are uniquely associated, the icon final display form as remarks, the first start Stores the pre-determination result specified by the oral winning designation command.

  “At the time of winning”, “before 2 changes → 1 change before”, “before 1 change”, “before 1 change → the change” and “the change” Represents the timing at which the icon display mode changes.

  Also, “Throwing Kiss Notice Success” indicates that a throwing kiss notice described later is performed and the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. “Throwing kiss notice failure 1” indicates that a throwing kiss notice described later is performed, but the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon does not change. Further, “throwing kiss notice failure 2” indicates that a throwing kiss notice to be described later is about to be performed, but the throwing kiss notice is not executed.

  In addition, the parentheses following “success kiss notice success” indicate the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon that changes according to the throw kiss notice.

  For example, in the icon display mode scenario “73” for throwing kiss notice, the hold icon in the normal form is displayed at the time of winning a prize, and the display mode of the hold icon in the throwing kiss notice is displayed in the change display of the special symbol immediately before the change. Tries to change to the second special mode 11, but the change is unsuccessful, remains in the normal mode, and is suspended when the change is started after the previous special symbol change display ends. The display mode of the icon changes to the second special mode 12, and in this change, the display mode of the changing icon is changed to the second special mode 13 by the throwing kiss notice.

(Final icon display table for handshake event notice)
FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of an icon final display mode determination table for handshake meeting advance notice.

  In the final display mode determination table for the handshake event notice shown in FIG. 55, the pre-determination result specified by the first start opening winning designation command, the first special figure hold number, and the final icon display for the handshake event notification are shown. A selection rate (%) based on a random number for mode determination, a final icon display mode to be selected, and a final color pattern corresponding to the final icon display mode are uniquely associated and stored.

  The final color pattern is used when selecting the dialogue count determination table used in the above-mentioned dialogue count determination, and is a pre-determination result indicated by the start entrance prize designation command related to the start entrance prize processing, the first special figure hold number And the identification information associated with the icon final display mode.

(Line number judgment table for handshake meeting notice)
FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating a dialog count determination table for handshake meeting notice.

  In the dialogue count determination table for handshake meeting notice shown in FIG. 56, the final color pattern, the selection rate (%) based on the random number for dialogue count determination, and the selected dialogue count are uniquely associated with each other. The prior determination result specified by the first start opening winning designation command and the color of the icon are stored.

  The number of lines is set to 1 to 4, and the higher the number of lines, the higher the rate at which the icon changes. Therefore, the expectation of jackpot for each number of lines is 1 line <2 lines < Lines 3 times <lines 4 times.

(Icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for handshake meeting notice)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for handshake meeting advance notice.

  The icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table shown in FIG. 57 includes a final color pattern, the number of lines, and the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No is uniquely associated and stored.

  Icon display mode scenario determination TBL. “No” is identification information for selecting an icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 58) for handshake event notification that is used in the icon display mode scenario determination for the handshake event.

(Icon display mode scenario judgment table for handshake meeting notice)
FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of an icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake meeting advance notice.

  The icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake meeting notice shown in FIG. No, the icon display mode scenario for the handshake meeting notice selected by the random number for judging the icon display mode scenario for the handshake meeting and the effect contents of the icon display mode scenario for the handshake meeting notice are uniquely associated with each other. As a remark, the number of lines, the final icon display mode, and the preliminary determination result specified by the first start opening prize designation command are stored.

  “At the time of winning”, “1 change before change → the change” and “the (line) 1st”, “the (line) 2nd” “the relevant” “(Line) 3rd” and “(Line) 4th” represent the timing at which the icon display mode changes due to the handshake meeting notice.

  As described above, the number of dialogues that can appear from a given character in one handshake meeting notice is 1 to 4 times, and “the (part) first time” indicates the appearance of the first dialogue in the handshake meeting notice. “The second line” represents the appearance of the second line in the handshake meeting notice, “The third line” represents the third line appearance in the handshake meeting notice, "(Line) 4th" represents the appearance of the 4th line in the handshake meeting notice.

  “White” for “winning” indicates that the handshake event notice target hold icon is suddenly displayed in the fourth special mode 21 of white when displayed at the time of winning. On the other hand, “white” for “before 1 change → the change” indicates that the handshake meeting notice target hold icon displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning a prize is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the handshake meeting notice target is changing. When it becomes an icon, it shows that the said handshake meeting notice object changing icon is displayed with the 4th special aspect 11 of white.

  In addition, “˜successful success” means that the change to the color corresponding to “˜” of “˜successful success” is successful, and “˜successful failure” means “˜ The change to the color that falls under "" fails, specifically, it tries to change to the color that falls under "~", but returns to the color before the change in the middle of the change. In the present embodiment, the color change is performed from the lower end to the upper end of the handshake meeting notice hero.

  For example, in the icon display mode scenario “120” for handshake meeting notice, the handshake meeting notice target hold icon of the fourth special form 21 (the person part is white) is displayed at the time of winning, and the handshake meeting notice target hold icon is When the icon is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and becomes the changing icon for the handshake meeting notice object, it becomes the changing icon for the handshake meeting notice object of the fourth special mode 11 (the main character of the handshake meeting is white). After the appearance of the first dialogue, the handshake meeting hero's color changes to green after the handshake meeting hero's color of the changing icon for the handshake meeting notice subject changes to green. With the appearance of the second dialogue, after the inciting effect of whether or not the handshake party hero's color changes to red, the handshake party hero's color changes to red and the third dialogue appears. The handshake party owner After the reverberation of whether or not the color of the handshake changes to a zebra pattern, the color of the hero of the handshake party changes to the zebra pattern. This represents the content of the effect in which the color of the protagonist of the handshake meeting changes to a rainbow after the effect of whether or not it changes.

  In addition, in the icon display mode scenario “122” for handshake meeting notice, the handshake meeting notice target hold icon of the fourth special form 21 (the person part is white) is displayed at the time of winning, and the handshake meeting notice target hold icon is When the icon is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and becomes the changing icon for the handshake meeting notice object, the icon is the changing icon for the handshake meeting notice object of the fourth special mode 12 (the main character of the handshake meeting is green). After the appearance of the first dialogue, after the rendition of whether or not the handshake party hero's color changes to red, the handshake party hero's color changes to red and the second dialogue appears. In addition, after the reverberation of whether or not the color of the hero of the handshake party changes to the zebra pattern, the color of the hero of the handshake party returns to red without changing to the zebra pattern, and the appearance of the third dialogue , The color of the hero of the handshake meeting Whether the color of the handshake party hero changes to iridescent when the 4th line appears, after returning to red without changing to the zebra pattern after the indomitable effect of whether to change to the bra pattern This represents the contents of the production in which the color of the protagonist of the handshake meeting changes to a rainbow color after such a production is performed.

(Processing board update information update process)
With reference to FIG. 63, the hold information update processing of the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1305-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the current number of special symbols stored in the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1305-2, the sub CPU 102a responds to the special symbol memory designation command with the first special symbol storage designation command. The figure holding number (U1) or the second special figure holding number (U2) is updated.

  In step S1305-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special figure hold number (U1, U2) has decreased before and after the update. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure hold number has decreased, the process proceeds to step S1305-4. If the process is shifted and it is determined that the number of special figure holds has not decreased, the process moves to step S1305-8 because the number of special figure holds has increased.

  The sub CPU 102a shifts various types of effect information stored in each storage unit of the effect information hold storage area corresponding to the reduced number of special figure hold numbers (start ports) in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. .

  Specifically, the effect information (data) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. For example, various types of effect information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first effect information hold storage area are shifted to the third storage unit of the first effect information hold storage area. Further, the production information stored in the first storage unit of the first production information hold storage area is used as the production information common to the first production information hold storage area and the second production information hold storage area (the 0th memory). Part). Thereby, the production information stored in the storage area of the production information is deleted.

  In step S1305-5, the sub CPU 102a sends a hold icon shift control command (first hold display shift control command or second hold display shift control command) indicating the type of the reduced special figure hold number (start port) to the sub RAM 102c. Set to send buffer.

  The hold icon shift control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When receiving the hold icon shift control command, the image control board 105 performs a shift process for shifting the hold icon related to the start port indicated by the received hold icon shift control command toward the changing icon display area 142.

  In step S1305-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the hold icon to be performed from now on (execution of variable effect). ) To determine whether there is an icon that changes the display mode (executes a hold icon change notice), and if it is determined that there is an icon to change the display mode, the process proceeds to step S1305-7, If it is determined that there is no icon for changing the display mode, the on-hold information update process is terminated.

  In step S1305-7, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, an icon change control command indicating the change content according to the icon display mode scenario relating to the icon whose display mode is changed. Here, the “change contents according to the icon display mode scenario” includes an icon to be changed in the display mode and a display mode to be changed.

  The icon change control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. Upon receiving the icon shift control command, the image control board 105 changes the icon display mode according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received icon change control command, along with the shift of the hold icon related to the hold icon shift process.

  In step S1305-8, the sub CPU 102a adds a hold icon based on the increase in the number of special figure hold and a hold icon addition control command indicating the type of the increased special figure hold number (starting port) to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Set, and this hold information update process is completed.

  The hold icon addition control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. Upon receiving the hold icon addition control command, the image control board 105 additionally displays a hold icon corresponding to the start port indicated by the received hold addition control command.

  Since the icon presentation control command indicating the icon display mode scenario is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by executing the process of step S1303-20 described above, the icon change is performed in the hold information update process. The icon change notice may be executed by the image control board 105 without sending a control command.

(Production control board production mode setting process)
Next, the effect mode setting process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1308-1, the sub CPU 102a selects an effect mode determination table (see FIG. 65) for setting the effect mode, and in step S1308-2, the gaming state, the remaining number of time reductions, and the high stored in the sub RAM 102c. Check the remaining probability count.

  The effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 65 is a table for determining the effect mode. The game state (low probability game state, high probability game state, non-short time game state, short time game state), short time remaining number of times, high probability The remaining number of times, the production mode, and the production mode flag are associated.

  In step S1308-3, the sub CPU 102a determines the effect mode by comparing the gaming state, the remaining number of time reductions, and the remaining number of high probabilities in the selected effect mode setting table, and in step S1308-4, the determined effect mode is set. The corresponding effect mode flags “00H” to “04H” are set (stored) in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and this effect mode setting process is terminated.

(Determination design stop display pattern determination processing of the production control board)
Next, the effect symbol stop display pattern determination processing by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1310-1, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the received effect symbol designation command, and in step S1310-2, determines whether or not the special figure lottery (big hit determination) result is lost. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special drawing lottery (big hit determination) result is a loss, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1310-3, and determines that the special drawing lottery (big hit determination) result is not a loss, the process moves to step S1310-15. .

  In step S1310-3, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect information storage area or the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c to confirm the chance eye notice effect scenario, and in step S1310-4, the chance to change the effect that will be started in the future. It is determined whether or not to execute the eye notice effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the chance eye notice effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1310-5. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the chance eye notice effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1310-9.

  In step S1310-5, the sub CPU 102a selects an effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (see FIG. 67A) for chance eye notice, and in step S1310-6, the effect symbol stop display for chance eye notice effect. Determine the pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for chance eye notice, the type of chance eye of this time defined by the chance eye notice effect scenario, the effect symbol stop display pattern, and each effect The symbol stop display pattern selection rate (%) is uniquely associated and stored.

  For example, when the type of the chance eye this time is a blue symbol, a combination of a plurality of types of effect symbols whose colors are set to blue as the effect symbol stop display pattern (“2” “4” “6” or “6” “ 4 ”or“ 2 ”) is determined at a predetermined selection rate.

  In step S1310-7, the sub CPU 102a sets (stores) the effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1310-8, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect symbol stop display control command for the chance eye notice effect corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and performs the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process. Exit.

  In step S1310-9, the sub CPU 102a checks the pre-read zone effect scenario with reference to the storage area or the effect information hold storage area of the effect information in the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether or not an effect is executed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the zone turning effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1310-11, and if the sub CPU 102a determines not to execute the zone turning effect, the process proceeds to step S1310-15.

  In step S1310-11, the sub CPU 102a selects an effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (see FIG. 67 (b)) for the zone turning effect, and in step S1310-12, the effect symbol stop display pattern for the zone turning effect. To decide.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for the zone strike effect, the effect effect type defined by the zone sign effect scenario, the plurality of effect symbol stop display patterns, and each effect symbol The stop display pattern selection rate (%) is uniquely associated and stored.

  For example, if the type of sword production is a successful singer production, the combination of “look ahead” symbol, “rush” symbol, and “zone” symbol (special symbol assortment) will be 100% selection rate. Will be decided. Further, if the type of the hit production is the hit failure production 1, the combination of the “prefetch” symbol, the “1 (green)” symbol, the “zone” symbol or the “prefetch” symbol is used as the production symbol stop display pattern. The combination of the “(green)” symbol and the “zone” symbol is determined with a selection rate of 50%.

  In step S1310-13, the sub CPU 102a sets (stores) the effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1310-14, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect symbol stop display control command for zone turning effect corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and performs the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process. finish.

  In step S1310-15, the sub CPU 102a checks the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1310-16, the sub CPU 102a responds to the effect mode. A normal effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (for example, see FIG. 67 (c)) is selected, and a normal effect symbol stop display pattern is determined in step S1310-17.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (c), the normal effect symbol stop display pattern determination table corresponding to the effect mode includes an effect symbol designation command, a special drawing lottery result, and a plurality of types of normal effect symbol stop display patterns. The selection ratio (%) of each normal effect symbol stop display pattern is uniquely associated and stored.

  In step S1310-18, the sub CPU 102a sets (stores) the normal effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the determined normal effect symbol stop display pattern in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1310-19, the sub CPU 102a sets a normal effect symbol stop display control command corresponding to the determined normal effect symbol stop display pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process. To do.

  Note that the effect symbol stop display control command set in the transmission buffer in step S1310-8, step S1310-14, step S1310-19, and the like described above is performed by the data output processing in step S1900 and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. Sent to. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop display control command, when the special symbol stop display is performed, the effect display based on the effect symbol stop display pattern indicated by the command is displayed on the image display device. 14 display units 140 are stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, in the chance eye notice effect, the effect symbol related to the chance eye notice effect is stopped and displayed for the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit 140. Further, in the successful turn effect, the special symbol related to the turn effect is stopped and displayed for the left region, the center region, and the right region of the display unit 140. Further, in the turn failure production 1, the special design related to the turn production is stopped and displayed for the left area and the right area of the display unit 140, and the normal production design related to the turn production is displayed for the center area. It will be stopped and displayed. Further, in the turn failure production effect 2, the special design related to the turn production is stopped and displayed for the left region of the display unit 140, and the normal production design related to the turn production is stopped for the center region and the right region. Will be displayed.

(Change control pattern determination processing of effect control board)
The variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1312-1, referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and the effect information of the sub RAM 102c and the pre-read zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area, the current effect mode and Check the pre-read zone production scenario.

  In step S1312-2, a variation effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 69 to 73) associated with the current effect mode and the prefetch zone effect scenario is selected. This is because the variation effect pattern determination table for determining the effect contents of the variation effect is set in association with the effect mode (effect modes A to C) and the prefetch zone effect scenario.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 to 73, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with each effect mode includes a selection rate (a determination result of jackpot determination, a special figure variation pattern designation command, a variation effect pattern determination random number). %), The type of variation effect pattern to be selected, the variation effect control command corresponding to the variation effect pattern, the time of variation effect corresponding to the variation effect pattern, and the effect contents of the variation effect.

  The variation effect pattern is an effect aspect of the variation effect, and by determining the variation effect pattern, the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the effect accessory device 17, and The specific effect content (mode) of the change effect performed by the effect button device 18 is also determined. For example, the effect contents of the change effect in the image display device 14 include the elements of the change effect such as the effect display change display mode (presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect), the presence / absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, and the effect development configuration. Are associated. Details of the variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special figure variation pattern designation command stored in the storage area of the effect information of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a displays a random number counter related to the random number for variation effect pattern determination. In step S1312-5, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the special figure variation pattern designation command, and the variation effect pattern determination random number are collated with the variation effect pattern determination table selected in step S1312-2. A variation production pattern is determined.

  In step S1312-6, the sub CPU 102a sets a variation effect control command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1312-7, the variation effect time that is the effect time of the variation effect is set. In step S1312-8, the variable effect data corresponding to the variable effect pattern is set in the variable effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the fluctuation effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the effect display device such as the image display device 14 to execute the change effect based on the change effect pattern indicated by the command.

  The variation effect timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the variation effect was started, by the variation effect timer counter.

(Variation effect pattern judgment table)
69 to 73 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when a variation effect pattern is determined. 69 to 71 are variation effect pattern determination tables for effect mode A, FIG. 72 is a variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode B, and FIG. 73 is a variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode C. It is a figure which shows a table.

  Of the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode A, FIG. 69 is a table selected when the zone precursor effect and the prefetch zone effect are not executed, and FIG. FIG. 70B is a table selected at the time of execution of the zone turning failure production 2, and FIG. 70C is a table selected at the time of execution of the zone turning success production. Yes, FIG. 71 is a table selected during execution of the prefetch zone effect.

  Here, each term described in the production contents of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69 to 73 will be described.

  “No simulated resurrection” means that a simulated resurrection effect that indicates the occurrence of a pseudo-continuous effect or a chance stop is temporarily stopped (the occurrence of a pseudo-continuous effect is expected) is not executed. . “Pseudo-turning failure” means that the false-turning effect is executed but the pseudo-continuous symbols and chances are not temporarily stopped. “Successful simulation” means that the simulation effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbols and chances are temporarily stopped. “Pseudo-continuous” means that the temporary change of the temporarily stopped effect symbol is executed.

  “Reach roll failure” means that the reach roll effect is executed whether or not the reach effect is executed, but the reach effect is not executed because the reach is not established. “Success in reaching the reach” means that the reach effect is executed, the reach is established, and the reach effect is executed.

  “Shortening variation” means that a shortened variation effect is executed in which the production time (variation time) is shorter than the normal variation (6 seconds or 8 seconds) and no reach occurs. “Super-shortening variation” means that a super-shortening variation effect is executed in which the production time (fluctuation time) is shorter than the shortened variation effect (2 seconds or 4 seconds) and no reach occurs.

  “N reach” means that a normal reach effect is executed. “N-reach (transition effect)” indicates a transition to a normal reach effect, an SP reach effect, or an SPSP reach effect (executed in the process of developing into an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect). Means that is executed. “N reach (transition / return effect)” means that the normal reach effect and the transition effect are executed, but the return effect is not executed, so that it does not develop into the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect.

  “SP reach 1” means that a dedicated (unique) first SP reach effect is executed in effect mode A (normal game state). “SP reach 2” means that a dedicated (specific) second SP reach effect is performed in effect mode A (normal game state). It should be noted that the second SP reach production is set so that the expectation of winning a big hit (special game is executed) is higher than the first SP reach production.

  “SP reach 3” means that the third SP reach effect dedicated (unique) is executed in the effect mode B (probability game state). “SP reach 4” means that a dedicated (unique) fourth SP reach effect is executed in effect mode B (probability game state). Note that the fourth SP reach production is set to have a higher expectation of winning the big win (special game is executed) than the third SP reach production.

  “SP reach 5” means that a dedicated (unique) fifth SP reach effect is executed in effect mode C (low-probability short-time gaming state). “SP reach 6” means that a dedicated (unique) sixth SP reach effect is performed in effect mode C (low-probability short-time gaming state). Note that the sixth SP reach production is set to have a higher expectation of winning the big win (special game is executed) than the fifth SP reach production.

  “SPSP reach 1” means that a dedicated (unique) first SPSP reach effect is performed in effect mode A (normal game state). “SPSP reach 2” means that a dedicated (specific) second SPSP reach effect is executed in effect mode A (normal game state). Note that the second SPSP reach production is set to have a higher expectation of winning the big win (special game is executed) than the first SPSP reach production.

  “SPSP reach 3” means that the third SPSP reach effect dedicated (specific) is executed in the effect mode B (probability game state). “SPSP reach 4” means that a dedicated (unique) fourth SPSP reach effect is performed in effect mode B (probability game state). Note that the fourth SPSP reach production is set to have a higher expectation of winning the big win (special game is executed) than the third SPSP reach production.

  “SPSP reach 5” means that a dedicated (unique) fifth SPSP reach effect is executed in effect mode C (low-probability short-time gaming state). “SPSP reach 6” means that a dedicated (unique) sixth SPSP reach effect is executed in effect mode C (low-probability short-time gaming state). Note that the sixth SPSP reach production is set to have a higher expectation of winning the big win (special game is executed) than the fifth SPSP reach production.

  “ST effect 1” means that the first step effect, which is the first step of the story effect consisting of a plurality of steps (stages), is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. “ST effect 2” means that the second step effect, which is the second step of the story effect, is executed. “ST effect 3” means that the third step effect, which is the final step of the story effect, is executed.

  It should be noted that the story production has a high expectation of winning the jackpot as the step production progresses to the next step production with the temporary stop and re-variation (special production) of the production pattern in the pseudo-continuous production. It is a notice effect that suggests (expects the execution of a special game) and suggests that the expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than the case where the story effect is not executed (the expectation of the execution of the special game). It is a kind. In addition, the degree of expectation of winning the special game when each step effect of the story effect is executed is first step effect <second step effect <third step effect.

  “Zone-turning failure effect 1” means that zone-turning failure effect 1 that checks whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is executed is executed. “Zone-turning failure 2” means that zone-turning failure production 2 is executed to determine whether or not the pre-reading zone production is executed. “Successful zone turning” means that a successful zone turning effect is performed that notifies (directs) that the pre-reading zone effect is executed.

  “Zone effect” means that the first zone effect of the prefetch zone effect is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. “Thermal zone effect” means that the second zone effect of the prefetch zone effect is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  Note that the pre-read zone effect is a pre-reading notice effect that expects a big win by executing the zone effect over one or more variable effects (variable display of special symbols). It is a kind of sign production that suggests that it is expensive. In addition, the degree of expectation of winning the special game when each pre-reading zone effect is executed is the first zone effect <the second zone effect.

  Thus, each variation effect pattern determination table is executed by the image display device 14 by setting a dedicated variation effect pattern or by setting various effects to be executed at different rates. The effect mode of the variable effect is different for each effect mode (game state). Note that the type of variation effect pattern executed in the normal game state and the probability variation game state may be the same, or the type of variation effect pattern executed in the normal game state and the low probability short-time game state are the same. Alternatively, the types of variation effect patterns executed in the probability variation gaming state and the low probability short-time gaming state may be the same.

  As a first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69, 72, and 73, if a variation effect pattern with the same effect time (variation time) is used, the pseudo effect is not simulated. The variation effect pattern in which the rendition effect is executed has a higher expectation of winning the big hit (special game is executed). By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation on whether or not the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69, 72, and 73, if the effect time (variation time) is the same variation effect pattern, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed without the story effect. The variation effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed with the story effect is more likely to be a big hit (special game is executed) than the variable effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is accompanied by a story effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a third feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69, 72, and 73, the specific reach is achieved by executing the transition effect after the story effect (corresponding to the sign effect) is executed as the change effect pattern. The first story pseudo-variation effect pattern (corresponding to the first specific effect mode) that develops to the effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) and the transition effect is executed after the story effect is executed, but the return effect is executed The second story pseudo-variation effect pattern (corresponding to the second specific effect mode) is set in which the transition effect is executed after the return to the story effect and develops to the specific reach effect. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unprecedented novel variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The fourth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69, FIG. 72 and FIG. 73 is that the second story pseudo-variation effect pattern wins more than the first story pseudo-variation effect pattern (special game is executed). There are high expectations. In this way, when the story effect is executed, the player's expectation on whether it is the first story pseudo-variable effect pattern or the second story pseudo-variable effect pattern can be raised, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.

  As a fifth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69, 72, and 73, the story effect that returns after the return effect is executed in the second story pseudo-variation effect pattern is the first before the transition effect is executed. The second step effect is not the second step effect but the third step effect (step skipping is performed across the transition effect). In this way, the difference between the first story pseudo-variation effect pattern and the second story pseudo-change effect pattern can be clarified, and the player's expectation for the second story pseudo-change effect pattern can be increased, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the second story pseudo-variation effect pattern described above, the story effect that returns after the return effect is executed is the third step effect, but may be the second step effect. Moreover, what performs a 2nd step effect after a return effect is performed is made into a 2nd story pseudo-variation effect pattern, and what performs a 3rd step effect after a return effect is performed is a 3rd story pseudo-change effect pattern. And the expectation of winning a big hit (special game is executed) when each story pseudo-variation effect pattern is executed is defined as the first story pseudo-change effect pattern <second story pseudo-change effect pattern <third story pseudo-change effect It is good also as a pattern. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the step skipping is performed across the return effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in each story pseudo-variation effect pattern, the SPSP reach effect may be executed via the SP reach effect after the transition effect, or the SPSP reach effect may be executed after the transition effect without passing through the SP reach effect. You may make it perform. Further, although the story effect (predictive effect) is executed in the variable effect pattern accompanied by the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, it may be executed in the variable effect pattern not accompanied by the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect.

  As a first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, a specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach) is performed by executing a transition effect after a zone effect (corresponding to a sign effect) is executed as a change effect pattern. The transition effect is executed after the first zone pseudo variation effect pattern (corresponding to the first specific effect mode) and the zone effect are executed, but the return effect is executed to return to the zone effect. The second zone pseudo-variable effect pattern (corresponding to the second specific effect mode) is set in which the transition effect is executed and then developed into the specific reach effect. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unprecedented novel variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, the second zone pseudo variation effect pattern is more likely to win a big win (special game is executed) than the first zone pseudo variation effect pattern described above. Is a high point. In this way, when the pre-read zone effect is executed, it is possible to excite the player's expectation as to whether it is the first zone pseudo-variable effect pattern or the second zone pseudo-variable effect pattern. It is possible to improve interest.

  As the third feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, the second zone pseudo variation effect pattern has a higher expectation of winning a big hit (special game is executed) than the first zone pseudo variation effect pattern. A point is mentioned. In this way, when the zone effect is executed, it is possible to excite the player's expectation as to whether it is the first zone pseudo-variable effect pattern or the second zone pseudo-variable effect pattern. Can be improved.

  As a fourth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, the transition effect is executed after the first zone effect is executed, but the transition is performed after returning to the second zone effect by executing the return effect. A third zone pseudo-variation effect pattern (corresponding to the third specific effect mode) is set in which the effect is executed and developed into a specific reach effect. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the zone effect is promoted across the return effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a fifth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, the third zone pseudo variation effect pattern has a higher expectation of winning a big win (special game is executed) than the second zone pseudo variation effect pattern. A point is mentioned. By doing in this way, when a zone effect is performed, the player's expectation with respect to which of the first to third zone pseudo-variable effect patterns can be raised, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

  In each zone pseudo-variable production pattern, the transition to the SP reach production after the transition production is made (development) and then the SPSP reach production is made (development). It is also possible to shift (develop) to SPSP reach production. In addition, the zone effect (predictive effect) is executed in the variation effect pattern accompanied by the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, but may be executed in the variable effect pattern not accompanied by the execution of the pseudo continuous effect.

  In addition, the zone precursor effect and the pre-read zone effect are not executed in the effect mode B (probability variation gaming state) and the effect mode C (low probability short-time gaming state), but are executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C. Alternatively, it may be executed in effect mode B or effect mode C.

  In addition, the execution probability of the zone sign effect and the prefetch zone effect may be made different in each effect mode. For example, the zone sign effect and the effect mode become advantageous to the player in order to eliminate the player's troublesomeness. The execution probability of the pre-read zone effect may be lowered (effect mode A> effect mode B, effect mode A> effect mode C, effect mode A> effect mode C> effect mode B, etc.), and vice versa. In order to further increase the player's expectation, the execution probability of the zone precursor effect and the pre-read zone effect increases as the effect mode becomes more advantageous to the player (effect mode A <effect mode B, effect mode A <effect Mode C, effect mode A <effect mode C <effect mode B, etc.).

  Further, in each effect mode, only the pre-read zone effect may be executed without executing the zone sign effect, or the zone precursor effect and the pre-read zone effect are executed in some effect modes, but in other effect modes. Only the prefetch zone effect may be executed. Even in this case, the execution probability of the prefetch zone effect in each effect mode may be varied as described above.

(Produce effect judgment processing of effect control board)
The correct effect determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1313-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the jackpot determination result and the variation effect pattern, and in step S1313-2, acquires the random effect pattern determination random value.

  In step S1313-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current time is in the short-time gaming state (including high-probability time and low-probability time). If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not in the short time gaming state, it moves the process to step S1313-4, and if it determines that it is in the short time gaming state, it moves the process to step S1313-5.

  In step S1313-4, the sub CPU 102a selects the correct effect pattern determination table 1 (see FIG. 75A), and moves the process to step S1313-6. In step S1313-5, the sub CPU 102a selects the correct effect pattern determination table 2 (see FIG. 75B) and moves the process to step S1313-6. The correct effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 1313-6, the sub CPU 102 a collates the selected winning effect pattern determination table with the jackpot determination result, the changing effect pattern, the determined effect pattern determining random value, and the like to determine the determined effect pattern.

  The correct effect pattern is an execution mode of the correct effect that definitely informs (suggests) that the result of the variable display (variable effect) is a big hit, and a pattern in which the correct effect is not executed and the audio output device 15. There is a pattern in which a certain effect is executed by a combination of a sound effect and a lighting effect by the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33, and a pattern in which a certain effect is executed by a blowing effect by the blower 34.

  In step S <b> 1313-7, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not the determined accurate effect pattern is an accurate effect execution pattern for executing the accurate effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the correct effect execution pattern, it moves the process to step S1313-8, and if it determines that it is not the correct effect execution pattern, it ends the true effect determination process.

  In step S1313-8, the sub CPU 102a sets the correct effect pattern command corresponding to the correct effect execution pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the true effect determination process.

  The correct effect pattern command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the correct effect pattern command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause various effect devices to execute the correct effect based on the correct effect pattern indicated by the command at the timing based on the correct effect pattern. .

(Accurate production pattern determination table)
FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing the winning effect pattern determination table 1 referred to in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 75 (b) is the winning effect referred to in the short time gaming state with high probability or the short gaming state with low probability. It is a figure which shows the pattern determination table.

  In the correct effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75, the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the execution rate (%) of the correct effect based on the random value for determining the correct effect pattern, and the selection rate of the execution location of the correct effect The type of the certain effect pattern to be selected is uniquely associated and stored.

  The execution location of the certain effect is the first frame of the start of change, which is the timing at which the first frame image is displayed when the display of the effect symbol 70a is started on the image display device 14, and the reach display is performed on the image display device 14. SP, which is the timing at which the first frame image is displayed when the first frame image is displayed, and the first frame image is displayed when the SP reach effect is started on the image display device 14. The first SPSP reach start frame, which is the timing for displaying the first frame image when the SPSP reach effect is started on the image display device 14, is set.

  The accurate production pattern 0 is an accurate production pattern in which the accurate production is not executed, the accurate production pattern 1 is an accurate production pattern in which the accurate production is executed in the first frame of the fluctuation, and the accurate production pattern 2 is the reach start 1 The certain effect production pattern in which the certain effect production is executed in the frame, the certain effect production pattern 3 is the certain effect production pattern in which the certain production effect is executed in the first frame of the SP reach, and the certain effect production pattern 4 is the SPSP reach start 1. This is an accurate effect pattern in which an accurate effect is executed at the frame.

  The correct effect patterns 1 </ b> A to 4 </ b> A are first correct effect patterns configured by a sound effect performed by the audio output device 15 and a light emission effect performed by the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33. 1B to 4B are second correct effect patterns configured by the air blowing effect performed by the air blowing device 34.

  As a first feature of the correct effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75, the correct effect pattern is referred to the correct effect pattern determination table 2 rather than the correct effect pattern determination table 1 to determine the correct effect pattern. The case where it is set so that the execution rate of the certain effect will be higher in the case where it is determined.

  By doing in this way, the effect production is executed with a higher probability in the short game state (high probability / low accuracy) than in the normal game state, while maintaining the rarity of the effect production in the normal game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the short game state when it is desired to make the game progress smoothly. Note that the execution probabilities of the winning effects may be set to be the same in the normal gaming state and the short-time gaming state, or may be reversed.

  As a second feature of the correct effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75, the correct effect pattern is referred to the correct effect pattern determination table 2 rather than the correct effect pattern determination table 1 to determine the correct effect pattern. The point when it is determined is set so that the certain effect is easily executed at an earlier stage (stage) of the variable display (variable effect).

  In this way, in the normal gaming state, it is easy to execute the winning effect at a time when the variable display is late, and in the short-time gaming state (probability changing game state), the winning effect is easily executed at an early time of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of delay in the short-time gaming state (probability varying gaming state) while pulling the player's expectation for the jackpot game in the normal gaming state until the time when the variation display is late. It should be noted that the execution timing of the certain effect may be set in the same manner in the normal gaming state and the short-time gaming state, or may be set in the opposite relationship.

  The third feature of the winning effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75 is that the first winning effect pattern and the second winning effect pattern are determined in the normal gaming state, whereas the (high probability / low certainty) short-time gaming state is determined. Then, the point set so that only the 1st winning production pattern may be determined is mentioned.

  By doing in this way, in the short-time gaming state advantageous for the player, the winning effect by the first winning effect pattern that is more conspicuous than the second winning effect pattern becomes easier to be executed. It is possible to beat and improve the interest of the game. In the short-time gaming state, the second winning effect pattern may be determined at the same rate as the first winning effect pattern, or may be determined at a rate different from the first winning effect pattern. Further, only one of the first winning effect pattern and the second winning effect pattern is determined in the normal gaming state, and only one of the first winning effect pattern and the second winning effect pattern is determined in the short-time gaming state. It may be determined.

(Pre-read zone production execution determination process of production control board)
The prefetch zone effect execution determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the prefetch zone effect scenario indicated by the prefetch zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1314-2, the prefetch zone effect execution is performed. It is determined whether or not the prefetch zone effect is executed with the (current) variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation pattern designation command related to the determination process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the prefetch zone effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1314-3. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the prefetch zone effect is not to be executed, the pre-read zone effect execution determination process ends.

  In step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a prefetch zone effect control command corresponding to the prefetch zone effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Set to the send buffer.

  The prefetch zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the pre-read zone effect to be executed with the current variation effect when the pre-read zone effect control command is received, and the current time when the pre-read zone effect control command is not received. The pre-read zone effect is not executed with the fluctuation effect.

  Further, the icon effect control command for prefetch zone effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When receiving the icon effect control command for the prefetch zone effect, the image control board 105 changes the currently displayed icon display mode to the prefetch zone effect notification mode when the icon display mode is not the prefetch zone effect notification mode. When the icon control command for prefetch zone effect is received, the image control board 105 continues the prefetch zone effect notification mode if the icon is already displayed in the prefetch zone effect notification mode.

(Production control board icon change notice execution determination process)
The icon change notice execution determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1315-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario data stored in the storage area of the presentation information in the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1315-2, the sub CPU 102a is responsible for the current icon change notice determination process. It is determined whether or not a throwing kiss notice is to be executed with a variation effect (corresponding to a special figure variation pattern designation command).

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that the throwing kiss notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1315-3. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the throwing kiss notice is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1315-4.

  In step S1315-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a throwing kiss notice effect control command indicating the contents of the effect corresponding to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1315-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and makes this icon change notice determination. The process ends. Here, in the “production contents according to the icon display scenario”, whether the character related to the throwing kiss notices whether to throw or leave, and the icon that the thrown heart hits when throwing kiss (the notice of the notice) The target icon), whether or not to change the display mode of the icon, and the display mode after the change when changing the icon.

  The throwing kiss notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the throw kiss notice effect control command, the image control board 105 causes the throw kiss notice to be executed according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received throw kiss notice effect control command. Details of the throwing kiss notice will be described later.

  In step S1315-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not to execute the handshake meeting advance notice with the change effect (corresponding to the special figure change pattern designating command related to the present icon change determination process). If it is determined to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1315-5, and if it is determined not to execute the handshake meeting notice, the icon change notice determination process is ended.

  In step S1315-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a handshake meeting notice effect control command indicating the contents of the effect corresponding to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1315-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and determines whether the icon change notice is present. The process ends. Here, the “production contents according to the icon display mode scenario” includes the number of dialogues in the handshake meeting notice and the change pattern of the display mode of the changing icon.

  The handshake meeting notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When receiving the handshake meeting notice effect control command, the image control board 105 executes the handshake meeting notice according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received handshake meeting notice effect control command. Details of the handshake meeting notice will be described later.

(Pre-read zone production end determination process of production control board)
The prefetch zone effect end determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1318-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the prefetch zone effect scenario indicated by the prefetch zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the prefetch zone effect ends with the current variation effect. It is determined whether or not. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the prefetch zone effect ends, the process proceeds to step S1318-2. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the prefetch zone effect does not end, the process proceeds to step S1318-4.

  In step S1318-2, the sub CPU 102a ends the prefetch zone effect and sets a prefetch zone effect end control command for returning to the background image for the effect mode A to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  The prefetch zone effect end control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. Upon receiving the prefetch zone effect end control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 end the prefetch zone effect, and use the background image, BGM, and the lighting effect mode of the effect lighting device 16 for the current effect mode. Return to the one.

  In step S1318-3, the sub CPU 102a executes an icon effect control command (hereinafter referred to as “first”) to change the display mode of all icons displayed in the prefetch zone effect notification mode to the normal mode by executing the prefetch zone effect. "Reset icon effect control command") is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  Thereby, an icon effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and all the prefetch zone effect notification mode icons displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 are changed to the normal mode. Processing for changing (returning) is performed.

  In step S1318-4, the sub CPU 102a checks the zone precursor effect scenario indicated by the zone precursor effect scenario data stored in the storage area of the effect information of the sub RAM 102c, and the gaze zone precursor effect ends with the current variable effect. It is determined whether or not. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaze zone sign effect is to end, it moves the process to step S1318-5, and if it determines that the gaze zone sign effect is not to end, it ends the prefetch zone effect end determination process.

  In step S1318-5, the sub CPU 102a executes an icon effect control command (hereinafter referred to as “second”) to change the display mode of all icons displayed in the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode to the normal mode by executing the gasse zone precursor effect. "Reset icon effect control command") is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  As a result, the second reset icon effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and all the prefetch zone effect suggestion icons displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 are displayed. A process for changing (returning) to the normal mode is performed.

(Stage waiting display control processing of production control board)
The customer waiting display control process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1400-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the menu display during the customer waiting state is currently being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the menu display execution flag “01M” is set in the menu display execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the menu display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1400-2, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the menu display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1400-5.

  In step S1400-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not an effect button detection signal indicating that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1400-3. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation of the effect button 18A has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S1400-9.

  In step S1400-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a menu display end command for instructing the end of menu display in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1400-4.

  In step S1400-4, the sub CPU 102a clears the menu display execution flag “01M” set in the menu display execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1400-5.

  In step S1400-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the customer is currently waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is waiting for a customer, it moves the process to step S1400-6, and if it determines that it is not waiting for a customer, it moves the process to step S1400-9.

  In step S1400-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not an effect button detection signal indicating that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1400-7. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation of the effect button 18A has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S1400-9.

  In step S1400-7, the sub CPU 102a sets a menu display start command for instructing start of menu display in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1400-8.

  In step S1400-8, the sub CPU 102a sets the menu display execution flag “01M” in the menu display execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1400-9.

  In step S1400-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a variation effect or a jackpot game is started. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the variation effect or jackpot game has been started, the process proceeds to step S1400-10. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the variation effect or jackpot game has not started, the sub CPU 102a ends the customer waiting display control process.

  In step S1400-10, the sub CPU 102a clears information relating to the customer waiting state set in the sub RAM 102c, and ends the customer waiting display control process. Specifically, the menu display execution flag set in the menu display execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c is cleared.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the menu display is performed by operating the effect button 18A and the display is displayed by operating the effect button 18A again during the waiting state of the customer in which the variable effect or the jackpot game is not executed. The previously displayed menu display is erased from the image display device 14.

◇ (Right-handed display control processing 1 of production control board)
The right-handed display control process 1 of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the right-handed display control process of the effect control board 102 in the present embodiment, the player is directed to the right area 2AR of the game area 2A during the high-probability short-time game state, the low-probability short-time game state, and the big hit game round. In order to prompt the player to fire the game ball, the first right-handed image KMG1 (ZMG, OMG) is displayed on the upper right side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 (FIGS. 82 (b) to (b)). d)).

  Further, when a game ball is entered into the first start port 6 of the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A during the high-probability short-time game state, the low-probability short-time game state, or the big hit game, In order to strongly urge that the game ball should be launched toward the right region 2AR, the second right-handed image KMG2 or the second right-handed image KMG2 is displayed at the center of the display unit 140 where the first right-handed image KMG1 has already been displayed. 3 A right-handed image KMG3 is additionally displayed. A specific mode of displaying the first right-handed image KMG1 to the third right-handed image KMG3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1700-1, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is currently being displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, whether or not the second right-handed display flag “02R” is set in the second right-handed display flag storage area of the sub-RAM 102c, or the third right-handed display flag storage area is displayed as the third right-handed display flag. It is determined whether or not the flag “03R” is set. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is not being displayed, the process moves to step S1700-2 to display the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S1700-6.

  In step S1700-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the first right-handed image KMG1 is currently being displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first right-handed display flag “01R” is set in the first right-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the first right-handed image KMG1 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1700-10. If the sub-CPU 102a determines that the first right-handed image KMG1 is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1700-3. .

  In step S1700-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the gaming state has been changed to a jackpot gaming state or a short-time gaming state (high-probability short-time gaming state, low-probability short-time gaming state). Specifically, whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, and in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 64, the effect mode flag “01H” is stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether or not “04H” is set. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming state has been changed to the jackpot gaming state or the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1700-4 and determines that the gaming state has not been changed to the jackpot gaming state or the short-time gaming state. The right-handed display control process is terminated.

  In step S1700-4, the sub CPU 102a sets a first right-handed display start command for instructing the start of display of the first right-handed image KMG1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1700-5. . The first right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the first right-handed image KMG1 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The “first right-handed notification” is executed. Details of the “first right-hand notification” will be described later.

  In step S1700-5, the sub CPU 102a sets the first right-handed display flag “01R” in the first right-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the right-handed display control process.

  In step S1700-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the second right-handed display time or the third right-handed display time set in the second right-handed display time timer counter or the third right-handed display time timer counter has elapsed. Determine whether. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the second right-handed display time or the third right-handed display time has elapsed, the process moves to step S1700-7, and the second right-handed display time or the third right-handed display time has not elapsed. If determined, the process proceeds to step S1700-9.

  In step S1700-7, the sub CPU 102a instructs to end “second right-handed notification” including display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or “third right-handed notification” including display of the third right-handed image KMG3. Therefore, the second right-handed display end command or the third right-handed display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the process proceeds to step S1700-8. The second right-handed display end command or the third right-handed display end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the “first The “2 right-handed notification” or “third right-handed notification” is ended.

  In step S1700-8, the sub CPU 102a performs the second right handed display flag “02R” in the second right handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c or the third right handed display flag “03R” in the third right handed display flag storage area. Is cleared and the process proceeds to step S1700-2.

  In step S1700-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the gaming state has been changed to the normal gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming state has been changed to the normal gaming state, it moves the process to step S1700-7, and if it determines that the gaming state has not been changed to the normal gaming state, it moves the process to step S1700-2.

  In step S1700-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming state has been changed to the normal gaming state or whether the jackpot gaming state has ended. Specifically, in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 64, whether or not the effect mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub-RAM 102c, or the command stored in the reception buffer is the ending designation. It is determined whether or not it is a command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming state has been changed to the normal gaming state or the jackpot gaming state has ended, the process moves to step S1700-11, and the gaming state has not been changed to the normal gaming state, or If it is determined that the state of the jackpot game has not ended, the process proceeds to step S1700-13.

  In step S1700-11, the sub CPU 102a sets a first right-handed display end command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c in order to instruct the end of the “first right-handed notification” including the display of the first right-handed image KMG1. Then, the process proceeds to step S1700-12. The first right-handed display end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900, and the “first right-handed notification” is finished by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. Will be.

  In step S1700-12, the sub CPU 102a clears the first right-handed display flag “01R” in the first right-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the right-handed display control process.

  In step S1700-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the first start opening winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that a game ball has entered the first start port 6, the process proceeds to step S1700-14. If the sub CPU 102a determines that no game ball has entered the first start port 6, The display control process ends.

  In step S1700-14, the sub CPU 102a adds “1” to the counter value of the first start-entrance ball number counter N to update it, and moves the process to step S1700-15.

  In step S1700-15, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the counter value of the first start-in entrance ball number counter N is 2 or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value is not 2 or more, it ends the right-handed display control process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the first starting entrance ball number counter N is 2 or more, step S1700-16 Move processing to.

  In step S1700-16, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the customer is currently waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is waiting for a customer, it moves the process to step S1700-21, and if it determines that it is not waiting for a customer, it moves the process to step S1700-17.

  In step S1700-17, the sub CPU 102a sets a second right-handed display start command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c in order to instruct the start of display of the second right-handed image KMG2, and moves the process to step S1700-18. . The second right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the second right-handed image KMG2 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. “Second right-handed notification” is executed. Details of the “second right-handed notification” will be described later.

  In step S1700-18, the sub CPU 102a sets the second right-handed display flag “02R” in the second right-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1700-19.

  In step S1700-19, the sub CPU 102a sets the right-handed display time (for example, 10 seconds) to the second right-handed display time timer counter or the third right-handed display time timer counter, and the process proceeds to step S1700-20. Move.

  In step S1700-20, the sub CPU 102a clears the first start-entrance ball number counter value N, and moves the process to step S1700-3.

  In step S1700-21, the sub CPU 102a sets a third right-handed display start command for instructing the start of display of the third right-handed image KMG3 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1700-22. . The third right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the third right-handed image KMG3 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The “third right-handed notification” is executed. Details of the “third right-handed notification” will be described later.

  In step S1700-22, the sub CPU 102a sets the third right-handed display flag “03R” in the third right-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1700-19.

  Here, in the right-handed display control process, it is determined in step S1700-15 whether or not the counter value of the first starting entrance ball number counter N is 2 or more, and the counter value is 2 or more. If it is determined that there is a second right-handed display start command or a third right-handed display start command in step S1700-17 or step S1700-21 described above, the first start entrance ball When the counter value of the number counter N is 1 or more, the second right-handed display start command or the third right-handed display start command may be set in step S1700-17 or step S1700-21. In this case, when a ball entering the first starting port 6 is detected, the player immediately includes “second right-handed notification” including a second right-handed display or a third right-handed display “ The “third right-hand notification” can be executed.

  Further, in the right-handed display control process, “second right-handed notification” or “third right-handed notification” is executed based on the detection of a ball entering the first starting port 6. However, it is not limited to entering the first starting port 6, but instead of entering the first starting port 6, predetermined to the first to third general winning ports 11-1, 11-2, 11-3. When a number of balls are detected, “second right-handed notification” or “third right-handed notification” may be executed.

◇ (Left-handed display control processing 1 of production control board)
The left-handed display control process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the left-handed display control processing of the effect control board 102 in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is changed from the high-probability short-time gaming state or the low-probability short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state, the player is left on the left side of the gaming area 2A. In order to prompt the player to launch a game ball toward the region 2AL, the first left-handed image 1612 is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. 116 (c). A specific mode of displaying the first left-handed image 1612 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, when it is detected that the game ball has passed the winning gate 10 in the right area 2AR of the game area 2A during the normal game state, the game ball is fired toward the left area 2AL to the player. In order to urge the user to do this, as shown in FIGS. 117 (b) and 118 (b), the second left-handed image 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. Yes. The specific display mode of the second left-handed image 1622 and the third left-handed image 1632 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118.

  In step S1800-1, the sub CPU 102a is currently displaying any one of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 on the image display device 14. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, whether or not the first left-handed display flag “01L” is set in the first left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the second left-handed display flag “01L” is stored in the second left-handed display flag storage area. It is determined whether or not “02L” is set and whether or not the third left-handed display flag “03L” is set in the third left-handed display flag storage area. If the sub CPU 102a determines that any one of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1800-6. If it is determined that none of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1800-2.

  In step S1800-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the gaming state has been changed from the high probability short-time gaming state or the low probability short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 64, it is determined whether or not the effect mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game state has been changed to the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S1800-3. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game state has not been changed to the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S1800-9.

  In step S1800-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a first left-handed display start command for instructing the start of display of the first left-handed image 1612 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1800-4. . The first left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the first left-handed image 1612 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. “First left-handed notification” is executed. Details of the “first left-handed notification” will be described later.

  In step S1800-4, the sub CPU 102a sets the first left-handed display flag “01L” in the first left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1800-5.

  In step S1800-5, the sub CPU 102a sets the left-handed display time (for example, 3 seconds) as the first left-handed display time timer counter, the second left-handed display time timer counter, or the third left-handed display time timer. The counter is set to the counter and the left-handed display control process is terminated.

  In step S1800-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the timer counter set in any of the first left-handed display time timer counter, the second left-handed display time timer counter, and the third left-handed display time timer counter is left-handed. It is determined whether the display time has elapsed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the left-handed display time has elapsed for any of the timer counters, it moves the process to step S1800-7, and if it determines that the left-handed display time has not elapsed for any of the timer counters, The strike display control process is terminated.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines in step S1800-7 that the display time of the first left-handed image 1612 has elapsed based on the timer counter determined in step S1800-6 that the left-handed display time has elapsed. When it is determined that the display time of the second left-handed image 1622 has elapsed for the first left-handed display end command, the second left-handed display end command is received, and the display time of the third left-handed image 1632 has elapsed. If it is determined, the third left-handed display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the process proceeds to step S1800-8.

Here, since the first left-handed display end command instructs the end of the “first left-handed notification” including the display of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed display end command is used for the second left-handed image 1622. In order to instruct the end of “second left-handed notification” including display, the third left-handed display end command is used to instruct the end of “third left-handed notification” including display of the third left-handed image 1632. It is set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 102c.
The first to third left-handed display end commands are transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the “first left-handed notification”. Alternatively, “second left-handed notification” or “third left-handed notification” is ended.

  In step S1800-8, the sub CPU 102a terminates the display of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632, and stores the first left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The first left-handed display flag “01L”, the second left-handed display flag “02L” in the second left-handed display flag storage area, and the third left-handed display flag “03L” in the third left-handed display flag storage area are cleared. .

  In step S1800-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a winning gate passage designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10, the process proceeds to step S1800-12. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has not passed through the winning gate 10, the process proceeds to step S1800-10.

  In step S1800-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the fourth general winning opening 11-4. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a fourth general winning entry entrance designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that a game ball has entered the fourth general prize opening 11-4, the process proceeds to step S1800-12, and determines that no game ball has entered the fourth general prize opening 11-4. Then, the process proceeds to step S1800-11.

  In step S1800-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port 7. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a second start opening winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that a game ball has entered the second start port 7, the process proceeds to step S1800-12. If the sub CPU 102a determines that no game ball has entered the second start port 7, the left-handed display The control process ends.

  In step S1800-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the gaming state is currently the normal gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1700-13, and if it determines that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state, the left-handed display control process ends.

  In step S1800-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether it is currently waiting for a customer. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the customer waiting state, it moves the process to step S1800-14, and if it determines that it is not in the customer waiting state, that is, that the effect symbol is changing on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. Then, the process proceeds to step S1800-16.

  In step S1800-14, the sub CPU 102a sets a second left-handed display start command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c in order to instruct the start of display of the second left-handed image 1622, and the process proceeds to step S1800-15. . The second left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the second left-handed image 1622 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The “second left-handed notification” is executed. Details of the “second left-handed notification” will be described later.

  In step S1800-15, the sub CPU 102a sets the second left-handed display flag “02L” in the second left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1800-5.

  In step S1800-16, the sub CPU 102a sets a third left-handed display start command for instructing the start of display of the third left-handed image 1632 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1800-17. . The third left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the third left-handed image 1632 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The “third left-hand notification” is executed. Details of the “third left-handed notification” will be described later.

  In step S1800-17, the sub CPU 102a sets the third left-handed display flag “03L” in the third left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1800-5.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the second left-handed image 1622 during the customer waiting state shown in steps S1800-14 to S1800-15 and the change in the effect design shown in steps S1800-16 to S1800-17. It is also possible to make the execution conditions of each image display different for the display of the third left-handed image 1632 in the middle. In this case, for example, the process shown in steps S1800-14 to S1800-15 is a process accompanying the passage of the winning gate 10, while the process shown in steps S1800-16 to S1800-17 is the fourth general prize opening. By performing processing associated with entering 11-4 or entering the second starting port 7, the display of the second left-handed image 1622 in the waiting state for the customer is executed by passing the winning gate 10, and the effect design The display of the third left-handed image 1632 during the change is executed by entering the fourth general winning opening 11-4 or entering the second starting opening 7, and by changing the processing contents, It is also possible to reverse the execution conditions.

(Display example of image display device in each gaming state)
Next, display examples of the image display device 14 in each gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 (a) is a display example during the normal gaming state (effect mode A), and FIG. 82 (b) is a display example during the high-probability short-time gaming state (effect mode B). ) Is a display example during the low-probability short game state (effect mode C), and FIG. 82D is a display example during the jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), during the normal gaming state, an effect mode image AMG indicating the effect mode A is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit 140 Three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side in the center, and three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of the display unit 140 and the second reserved icon display area. The

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), during the high-probability time-short gaming state, an effect mode image BMG indicating the effect mode B is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit The right-handed image KMG1 that is the above-described high-accuracy display mode is displayed on the upper right side of 140, and the jackpot ream number image KRG that is the above-described high-accuracy display mode is displayed near the upper center of the display unit 140. Is displayed on the lower left side of the display unit 140. The high probability remaining number image KKG, which is the display mode for high accuracy described above, is displayed, and three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are arranged side by side in the center of the display unit 140. The three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 displayed on the lower right side of the display unit 140 and the second reserved icon display area 143.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (c), during the low-probability time-short gaming state, an effect mode image CMG indicating the effect mode C is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit The right-handed image ZMG which is the display mode for the above-mentioned time-saving is displayed on the upper right side of 140, and the jackpot villa time count image ZRG which is the display-mode for the above-mentioned time-saving is displayed near the upper center of the display unit 140. In the lower left part of the display unit 140, the time remaining number of times image ZKG, which is the display mode for the time reduction described above, is displayed, and in the center of the display unit 140, three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side. Three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of 140 and the second reserved icon display area 143.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (d), during the jackpot game (opening), the right-hand hit image OMG1 which is the above-mentioned jackpot display mode is displayed on the upper right side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, An opening image OPG indicating that the jackpot game is opening is displayed on the remaining portion of the display unit 140.

  The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that are displayed mainly in the normal gaming state (while waiting for a customer effect, during a fluctuating effect less than normal reach, etc.) are a vertically long rectangular symbol base image ZBG and nine types of characters. Is a composite image in which a character image CYG indicating any of the above and an identification image SG indicating any one of 1 to 9 corresponding to nine types of characters on a one-to-one basis are superimposed, and has a high decorative property ( The design pattern is complicated (the design is complicated, there are many colors, bright colors, etc.).

  The character image CYG is a single image imitating any of nine types of characters, and the identification image SG is a superposition of a hexagonal base image and any one of the numerical images 1 to 9 (identifier). This is a composite image.

  In addition, about the effect design of a 1st display aspect, you may make it memorize | store in CGROM105Bb as single symbol data, or memorize | store the symbol base image ZBG, the character image CYG, and the identification image SG separately in CGROM105Bb, and image You may combine, when displaying on the display apparatus 14. FIG. Further, the base image and the numeric image constituting the identification image SG may be separately stored in the CGROM 105Bb and combined when displayed on the image display device 14.

  In the present embodiment, even during the normal gaming state, the transition effect (development effect) starts from the transition effect until the SP / SPSP reach effect ends, that is, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ1 as described later. In the period in which TZ3 is displayed in the reduced size, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a second display mode (second effect symbol) to be described later, but in most other periods, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ1 are displayed. Since TZ3 is displayed in the first display mode, it can be said that the basic display mode of the effect symbol in the normal gaming state is the first display mode.

  The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that are mainly displayed during the high-probability short-time game state and the low-probability time-short game state (while waiting for a customer waiting effect and during all variation effects) are any of the numeric images 1 to 9 (identifiers). ) Is a single image and is less decorative than the first display mode effect design (simple design, less color, dark color, etc.) second display mode effect design (second effect design) It has become.

  In addition, about the effect design of a 2nd display mode, it is memorize | stored in CGROM105Bb as single design data, However, It is the same figure (form) as the number image which comprises the identification image SG in the effect design of a 1st display mode. Therefore, when the numeric image is independently stored in the CGROM 105Bb, it may be displayed on the image display device 14 using the same image data. In this way, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb from being pressed.

  In the present embodiment, during the high-probability time-short game state and the low-probability time-short game state, during the stand-by waiting for the customer effect and during the execution period of all the variable effects, the effect symbols of the second display mode are the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. Since it is displayed, it can be said that the basic display mode of effect symbols during the high-probability short-time gaming state and the low-probability time-short gaming state is the second display mode.

  The special effect symbol TZ4 displayed in the normal gaming state, the high-probability short-time gaming state, and the low-probability short-time gaming state superimposes a hexagonal base image and any numerical image (identifier) 1-9. The combined image is lower in decorativeness than the effect in the first display mode, but higher in decorativeness than the effect in the second display mode (complex design, more colors, bright colors, etc.) It is an effect symbol (third effect symbol) of three display modes.

  The effect symbol of the third display mode is stored in the CGROM 105Bb as a single symbol data, but has the same shape (form) as the identification image SG in the effect symbol of the first display mode. When the image SG is independently stored in the CGROM 105Bb, the image display device 14 may be displayed using the same image data. In this way, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb from being pressed.

  Thus, the types (basic display modes) of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that are mainly displayed in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), the high-probability short-time gaming state (effect mode B), and the low-probability time-short gaming state. The effect displayed on the image display device 14 when the gaming state is changed by changing the types (basic display modes) of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 that are mainly displayed in the effect mode C). The display mode of the symbol can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect symbol TZ4 is displayed in the third display mode in the normal game state (effect mode A), the high-probability short-time game state (effect mode B), and the low-probability short-time game state (effect mode C). The display is made with the symbol (third effect symbol), but the second display mode is like the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the short time gaming state (effect mode B) with high accuracy and the short gaming state (effect mode C) with low probability. You may make it display with the effect symbol (2nd effect symbol).

  In the normal gaming state (effect mode A), during the period in which the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is being executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed as effect symbols (second effect symbols) in the second display mode. However, it may be displayed in the third display mode effect symbol (third effect symbol) in the same manner as the special effect symbol TZ4.

In addition, the basic display mode of the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal gaming state (production mode A) is the first display mode, and in the high-probability short-time gaming state (production mode B) and the low-probability short-time gaming state (production mode C). Although the basic display mode of the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 was the second display mode,
The basic display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal game state is a third display mode that is more decorative than the second display mode, and the basics of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the high probability short game state and the low probability short game state The display mode may be the second display mode. In this case, it is preferable to display the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the second display mode from the transition effect in the variation effect executed in the normal gaming state until the SP / SPSP reach effect ends.

  Also, instead of notifying the result of the variation effect (variation display) by the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the variation effect (variation display) by the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the three special effect symbols TZ4. You may make it alert | report the result of.

  In addition, the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 when the variation effect (variation display) is finished are the same. The combination of TZ3 and the three special effect symbols TZ4 are made the same, and in the case of a loss, the combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the three special effect symbols TZ4 may be different. Also good. In that case, the number of patterns of the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 may be greater or less than the number of patterns of the combination of the three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3.

  In addition, although it did not touch on the change of the display mode of the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 when there is a change in the gaming state, here, a predetermined return condition (in this embodiment, a predetermined number of variable displays is executed). However, it may be replaced by winning a falling lottery), and a brief explanation will be given for returning from a specific gaming state such as a high probability short-time gaming state or a low probability short-time gaming state to a normal gaming state. Keep it.

  When returning from the specific game state to the normal game state based on the establishment of a predetermined return condition, an effect image for shielding the effect symbol displayed on the image display device 14 (for example, the background image of the display unit 140 is displayed). A stage change image for switching, a dedicated effect image for switching only the effect symbol, and the like, and a movable member for shielding the effect symbol displayed on the image display device 14 (positioned in front of the effect symbol) The first display of the effect design of the second display mode that is shielded (the visual recognition is restricted) with the execution of a predetermined effect such as an effect that activates a member that can be converted to a state of being retracted and a state of being retracted from the front) It is good to switch to the effect design of the aspect. The predetermined effect may not be an effect that shields the effect symbol, but may be an effect that can attract the player's attention.

(Direction flow for handshake meeting notice)
With reference to FIG. 83, an effect flow of handshake meeting notice will be described.

  First, the changing icon that is the subject of the handshake meeting notice is displayed in the changing icon display area 142, and when the change display of the effect design (variation effect) is started, the changing icon display is first performed as the handshake meeting notice. A handshake meeting place appears in the vicinity of the area 142, and a silhouette of a person related to the changing icon, a handshake character that shakes the handshake, and an escort character that escorts the handshake character appear at predetermined positions on the display unit 140.

  Then, when the handshake character and the changing icon shake hands and a predetermined line appears from the handshake character along with the handshake, the color starts to gradually change from under the changing icon, and the changing icon color changes. An effect of whether or not it changes (whether or not the display mode of the changing icon changes) (hereinafter referred to as “changed icon color change effect”) is executed. When the color changes completely (the color change succeeds), it becomes a so-called “promotion success (chance up)”, and the big win expectation degree for the changing icon increases, while the color change ends in the middle, When returning to the color before the changing icon color change effect is performed (the color change fails), the so-called “promotion failure” occurs, and the jackpot winning expectation for the changing icon is maintained.

  When the first changing icon color change effect is finished, the second dialogue appears again from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice continues, and the escort character is withdrawn from the changing icon. To branch when the handshake meeting notice ends.

  When the second dialogue appears again from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice continues, the second changing icon color change effect is performed. And, as with the case of the first time, the color change change effect during the second change is also completely changed (successful color change) and promoted successfully (chance up), or the color change is halfway Finished (color change failed) and failed promotion.

  When the second variation icon color change effect is finished, the third dialogue appears again from the handshake character, and when the handshake event notice continues, the escort character leaves the changing icon. A branch is made when guidance is given and the handshake meeting notice ends.

  When the third dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice continues, a third variation icon color change whirling effect is executed. And, as in the case of the first and second times, the icon color change whirling effect during the third change is either a complete change in color and a successful promotion (chance up), or the color change ends in the middle Promotion failure.

  When the third changing icon color changing effect is finished, the fourth dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice continues further, and the escort character provides exit guidance for the changing icon. Go and branch when the handshake meeting notice ends.

  When the 4th dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake meeting notice continues, the 4th change icon color change whirling production always changes completely and the promotion succeeds (chance up). The escort character provides exit guidance for the changing icon, and the handshake meeting notice ends.

(Example of handshake meeting notice)
Next, an example of the presentation of the handshake meeting will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the normal hold icons A10 to A12 are displayed on the first display unit 141a to the third display unit 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, the loss is detected. It is assumed that the effect design shown is stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 (b) to 84 (c), the hold icons A10 to A12 displayed on the first display unit 141a to the third display unit 141c are in the changing icon display area 142, the first While shifting to the display part 141a and the 2nd display part 141b, the fluctuation | variation display of an effect design is started. Since the hold icon A10 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A10 changes to the changing icon A10.

  When the effect symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is being executed, a game ball enters the first start port 6, and a first special diagram hold is newly generated. In response to the occurrence of the special figure hold, the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and it is determined that the handshake meeting notice is executed in the start opening prize process, and the number of lines of the handshake meeting notice is two times. “When the prize is awarded, the color of the changing icon in the fourth special mode 21 → the first dialogue changes to green (fourth special mode 12) → the color of the changing icon in the second dialogue is red (the fourth It is assumed that an icon display mode scenario for previewing a handshake meeting with the effect content changing to the special mode 13) is selected.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 85A, the hold icon A13 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the fourth special mode 21. At this time, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A10 does not change, but the hold icons A11, A12 corresponding to the preceding hold for the newly generated first special figure hold are the fourth special icons. While changing to the aspect 41, as shown in FIG. 85C, the handshake meeting venue AK appears in the vicinity of the changing icon display area 142 while being partially hidden in the effect EF1.

  When the handshake event notice is executed based on the occurrence of the first special figure hold, the hold icon A13 is displayed in the fourth special mode 21, and the hold icons A11 and A12 are displayed in the fourth special mode 41. However, a heart is attached to the chest portion of the silhouette of the person related to the hold icon A13 that is the subject of the handshake event notice so that the player can easily recognize the subject of the handshake event notice. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), when the effect EF1 is erased, the handshake character C1 that performs the handshake according to the handshake meeting notice and the escort character C2 that escorts the handshake character C1 enter the handshake meeting place AK. Appear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the effect symbol indicating the loss is stopped and the changing icon A10 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 86 (b), it corresponds to the hold icon A11. When the change display of the effect design to be started is started, the hold icons A11 to A13 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A11 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A11 is changed to the changing icon A11, and the display mode is changed from the fourth special mode 41 to the fourth special mode 31 with the shift. Change.

  As soon as the changing icon A11 is displayed in the changing icon display area 142, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon A11 and the handshake character C1 shake hands. Here, since the changing icon A11 is not the target of the jackpot winning expectation degree related to the handshake meeting notice, the dialogue does not appear from the handshake character C1, and the display mode (color) of the changing icon A11 also changes. do not do.

  86 (b) and 86 (c), the hold icon A13 of the fourth special mode 21, the hold icon A12 of the fourth special mode 41 and the changing icon A11 of the fourth special mode 31 are displayed. In other words, when a game ball enters the first start port 6 while the handshake meeting notice suggestion effect is being executed, the hold icon A14 corresponding to the ball is displayed in a normal manner. The

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the handshake meeting notice is executed, this is caused by entering the first start port 6 or the second start opening 7 before the handshake meeting notice is finished. This is because execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the figure hold. However, the icon display mode determined by permitting the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold generated by entering the first start port 6 or the like before the handshake meeting notice is finished. It is also possible to display the hold icon A14 in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

  As soon as the change display of the effect symbol corresponding to the changing icon A11 ends, as shown in FIG. 86 (d), the escort character C2 performs an operation of checking the clock, and the change display of the effect symbol ends. I suggest that. Then, when the changing production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start to stop, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (b), the escort character C2 performs an exit guidance operation on the changing icon A11. The handshake character C1 performs an action (bye-bye) to say goodbye to the changing icon A11, and the changing icon A11 is reduced as if leaving. As shown in FIG. 87 (c), when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 are stopped and displayed, the changing icon A11 is completely erased, and the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 return to the standby state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the hold icon A13 that is the target of the handshake meeting notice is shifted from the first display unit 141a to the changing icon display area 142, and the changing icon of the fourth special mode 11 is displayed. As soon as A13 is reached, the silhouette of the person related to the changing icon A13 and the handshake character C1 shake hands.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when a game ball enters the first start port 6 while the handshake event is being announced, the hold icon A15 corresponding to the ball is displayed in the normal mode. Is done. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the handshake meeting notice is to be executed, this occurs when the ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 before the handshake meeting notice ends. This is because execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold. However, the icon display mode determined by permitting the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special figure hold generated by entering the first start port 6 or the like before the handshake meeting notice is finished. It is also possible to display the hold icon A14 in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

  When the shaking icon A13 and the handshake character C1 in the fourth special mode 11 are shaken, the first dialogue appears from the handshake character C1 as shown in FIG. 88 (b), and FIG. 88 (c). As shown in FIG. 5, the changing icon color change effect is executed in which the color of the changing icon A13 gradually changes from the bottom (here, white to green). Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), when the color of the changing icon A13 is completely changed and the color change is successful, the changing icon A13 performs a guts pose and the change (promotion) of the color is successful. The translucent effect EF2 suggesting the success of the color change is displayed on the changing icon A13 so that the changing icon A13 is visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), when the changing icon A13 continues to shake the handshake character C1 with the color after changing by the first changing icon color change effect (green here). 89 (b), the second dialogue from the handshake character C1 appears, and the color of the changing icon A13 gradually changes from the bottom (here, green to red). Skill production is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), when the color of the changing icon A13 is completely changed and the color change is successful, the changing icon A13 performs a guts pause again, and the change (promotion) of the color changes. Take action that suggests success.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 90A, the reach state is established, the escort character C2 performs an exit guidance operation for the changing icon A13, and the handshake character C1 is separated from the changing icon A13. 90 (b) to 90 (c), a predetermined reach effect (for example, normal reach) is started when the notification of the end of the handshake meeting is notified. In addition, the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 are erased with the execution of the transition effect (development effect) that develops into SP reach, and the display mode of the changing icon A13 displayed in the fourth special mode 13 is the color at that time Is changed to the second special mode 13 common to red, and the handshake meeting notice ends, and the SP reach production is started.

  In addition, at the timing when the transition effect is executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and moved to the upper right part of the display unit 140, and are switched to the second display mode (second effect symbol), and after the SP reach effect ends. Returning to the first display mode (first effect symbol), the display unit 140 returns to a position on the effective line.

  As described above, the color of the changing icon (in a broad sense, the display mode) is gradually changed by the handshake meeting advance notice, and the changing icon color-changing effect indicating whether the color changes is performed. Thus, by displaying the color change process, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change of the changing icon and easily recognize the change of the changing icon color.

  In the present embodiment, it is the color that changes as the target of the handshake meeting advance notice, but this change target is not limited to the color, and may be the size or shape of the changing icon. Furthermore, the change process can be displayed by appropriately combining a plurality of elements constituting the display mode of the changing icon such as color, size, and shape. When combining multiple elements appropriately, for example, the color changes at the first dialogue appearance, the size changes at the second dialogue appearance, and the shape changes at the third dialogue appearance. It is also possible to change the elements that change according to the order.

  Further, in this embodiment, the handshake event notice is performed based on the prior judgment result, but the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, or the special figure fluctuation of the special figure judgment information subject to the handshake meeting notice. It is also possible to perform based on the pattern determination result.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the handshake meeting notice is executed at the start of the change display of the production symbol, but the execution timing of the handshake meeting notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the contents of the production of the change effect. can do. Other execution timings for handshake meeting notices include temporary stop or re-variation of pseudo-reams, step-up of so-called step-up notices, development of predetermined cut-in notices, dialogue notices, character appearances, or super reach. It can be set as appropriate, for example, when the development effect is executed, when the reach state is established, or when a predetermined action effect is executed by the effect accessory device 17.

  In this embodiment, the handshake event notice is performed for the changing icon, but it can also be performed for the hold icon. In this case, for example, the handshake meeting place appears near any one of the first display part 141a to the fourth display part 141d, and is displayed on the first display part 141a to the fourth display part 141d where the handshake meeting place appears. A handshake event notice may be given to the hold icon, and the process of color change (change in display mode) may be displayed. In this case, similar to the method (step S1305-19-14 to step S1305-19-18, etc.) in which the contents of the handshake meeting notice are determined by the icon display mode scenario determination for the handshake meeting notice in this embodiment. The handshake event can be announced in a simple way.

  Further, as another embodiment for performing the handshake meeting advance notice, for example, during the change display of the production symbol, the handshake character shakes all or some of the icons displayed at that time in order. Thus, the handshake meeting notice can be given to display the process of color change (change in display mode). In this case, for example, it can be performed by determining whether or not to execute the handshake meeting notice for any icon when the fluctuating effect is started, and determining the display mode after the change in execution. .

  In the present embodiment, while the icon color change (display mode change) process is displayed, the icon and the handshake character are shaking hands, in other words, the color change target icon. Although an action is being executed, some action is performed once or a plurality of times before the color change target icon changes color, and the color changes after the action ends (for example, a predetermined character appears on the target icon). The color of the target icon changes after the kiss is finished, and the color change can be made easier as the number of actions increases.

  In this embodiment, one to four dialogues appear for one handshake meeting notice, and one changing icon color change effect is performed with the appearance of one dialogue. The Therefore, the more lines that appear in a single handshake event notice, the more likely the color change will be, in other words, the higher the chance of winning a big hit (chance up). You can focus on the appearance of dialogue and improve the fun of the game. In addition, in one handshake event notice, even if the color change fails due to a certain changing icon color change effect, or even if the desired change does not occur, if the next line appears, the player's color Expectation for change (increased expectation of winning jackpot) can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, one handshake event notice is executed in one variation effect (effect symbol variation display), but a plurality of handshake event notices in one variation effect (effect symbol variation display). Can also be executed. And the number of dialogues for each handshake meeting notice in this multiple handshake meeting notice is decided by scenario or independent lottery, and the more the number of lines appearing in multiple handshake meeting notices, the more successful the color change In other words, it is possible to increase the possibility that the expectation degree of winning a big hit will increase (chance up).

  In addition, the greater the number of dialogues, the greater the likelihood of a successful color change, which means that the action is performed on the icon for which the handshake event is being held, in other words, the icon subject to the handshake event. The longer the time is spent, the higher the chance of a successful color change. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player pay attention to the operation.

  In the present embodiment, the number of dialogues is attributed to the time during which the number of dialogues is shaken because the production content is that one or more dialogues appear while the handshake meeting notices once. However, for example, in one dialogue, it is possible to change the time during which the handshake is changed by the length of the words in one dialogue, with the production content that one or more words are uttered.

  In this embodiment, one to four dialogues appear for one handshake meeting notice, and one changing icon color change effect is performed with the appearance of one dialogue. The Therefore, the greater the number of dialogues that appear in a single handshake meeting notice, the higher the likelihood of successful color change, in other words, the higher the chance of winning a jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the appearing handshake meeting venue AK, the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 are set to one type, but a plurality of types are set respectively, and the number of dialogues ( The number of steps for the handshake meeting notice), the time during which the handshake is given (direction time for the handshake meeting notice), and the expected level of success of the color change can be made different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first dialogue content, the second dialogue content, the third dialogue content, and the fourth dialogue content in the handshake meeting notice are set differently, and each dialogue content is set. Is set to one type. Here, a plurality of dialogue contents are set for each time, and the expected degree of color change success can be varied depending on the dialogue contents. It is also possible to set the content of dialogue depending on the type of handshake character. Further, the handshake character can be selected by the player by operating the selection button 19A and the effect button 18A in a preset period such as a waiting state for customers.

(Direction flow for throwing kiss notice)
With reference to FIG. 91, an effect flow of throwing kiss notice will be described.

  First, when the throwing kiss notice is started, a predetermined character first appears at a predetermined position on the display unit 140. In the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed with the start of the change display (change effect) of the effect symbol.

  The appearing character performs a throwing kiss for flying a heart toward any icon (holding icon or changing icon) that has already been displayed, or leaves without displaying the throwing kiss and disappears from the display unit 140. When the character leaves and disappears from the display unit 140, the throwing kiss notice ends.

  When a character performs a throwing kiss, a heart hits the icon that is the target of the throwing kiss, and a predetermined effect is generated on the icon. If the display mode of the icon changes after the effect disappears, the character disappears after performing an action corresponding to the successful change of the display mode.

  On the other hand, if the icon display mode has not changed after the effect has disappeared, the character disappears after performing an action corresponding to the failure of the display mode change.

(Example of throwing kiss notice)
Next, an example of the presentation of the handshake meeting will be described.

  First, the manner in which the throwing kiss notice is executed after the hold icon that is the subject of the throwing kiss notice changes to the special mode will be described with reference to FIGS. For example, as shown in FIG. 92A, the normal mode hold icon A21 is displayed on the first display unit 141a of the first hold icon display area 141, and the normal mode hold icon A20 is displayed on the changing icon display area 142. It is assumed that the change display (change effect) of the effect symbol is performed when displayed.

  Then, a game ball enters the first start port 6 and a new first special figure hold is generated, and a first start port winning designation command is generated according to the occurrence of the first special figure hold. It is determined that the throwing kiss notice is determined to be executed in the start winning process, and the throwing kiss notice is determined as the scenario 93.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the hold icon A22 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the normal mode, and then the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed. At the same time, the changing icon A20 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (c), when the change display of the effect symbol is started, the hold icons A21 to A22 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. Here, since the hold icon A21 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A21 changes to the changing icon A21. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon A22 changes to the second special mode 13 (red) in accordance with the shift to the first display unit 141a.

  Then, a game ball enters the first start port 6 and a new first special figure hold is generated, and a first start port winning designation command is generated according to the occurrence of the first special figure hold. Suppose that it is determined that the throwing kiss notice is not executed in the start winning process.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), the hold icon A23 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the normal mode, and thereafter, the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is displayed. At the same time, the changing icon A21 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), when the change display of the effect symbol is started, the hold icons A22 to A23 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display part 141a, respectively, and the throwing kiss is notified. Such a character C3 appears and the changing icon change notice is started. Here, since the hold icon A22 shifts to the changing icon display area, the hold icon A22 changes to the changing icon A22, and the display form changes from the second special form 13 (red) to the second special form in accordance with the shift. It changes to 14 (zebra pattern).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the character C3 performs a throwing kiss to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. The icon to which the heart HT is skipped is determined by the normal icon display mode scenario indicated by the normal icon display mode scenario data stored in the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Suppose the heart HT is skipped.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the heart HT hits the changing icon A20, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the changing icon A20, and the changing icon A20 becomes difficult or invisible. (Not shown).

  Thereafter, when the predetermined effect is deleted, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A22 changes from the second special mode 14 to the second special mode 15 (rainbow) and “power Up 20% "is displayed in the vicinity of the changing icon A22 that is the subject of the throwing kiss notice, and the icon display form from the audio output device 15 is notified that the icon display form has changed. A sound for notifying the change is output (for example, “power-up” is generated by the voice of the character C3), and the lighting device 16 for lighting performs a lighting effect in a mode dedicated to the change. In the present embodiment, change notification image HG is composed of an image including the text “power-up”, but the display mode is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate.

  Then, the character C3 is erased as shown in FIG. 94 (c) after performing an action corresponding to the successful change of the display mode (in FIG. 94 (b), an action of spreading both hands with a smile). .

  Next, the throwing kiss notice will be described using another specific example. For example, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), when the normal mode (white) hold icons A30 and A31 are displayed on the first display portion 141a and the second display portion 141b of the first hold icon display area 141. Suppose that the effect symbol indicating the loss is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the hold icons A30 and A31 displayed on the first display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. At the same time, when the effect symbol variation display is started, the character C3 related to the throwing kiss notice appears. Since the hold icon A30 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A30 changes to the changing icon A30.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the character C3 performs a throwing kiss to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. Here, it is assumed that the heart HT is skipped toward the changing icon A30.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), when the heart HT hits the changing icon A30, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the changing icon A30, and the changing icon A30 becomes difficult or invisible. (Not shown).

  Thereafter, when the predetermined effect is deleted, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the display mode of the changing icon A30 is changed to the second special mode 11 (white), and the audio output device 15 A sound for notifying the change is output (for example, “power-up” is generated by the voice of the character C3), and the lighting device 16 for lighting performs a lighting effect in a mode dedicated to the change.

  Then, the character C3 is erased as shown in FIG. 96 (c) after performing an action corresponding to the successful change of the display mode.

  As described above, when the changing icon changes due to the throwing kiss notice, the display of the change notification image HG by the image display device 14, the occurrence of “power-up” by the audio output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16 Since it is notified that the changing icon has changed by the lighting effect in a mode dedicated to the change, the player can easily recognize that the changing icon has changed.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the change notification image HG, it is notified that the changing icon has changed also when the character C3 performs a successful action according to the change of the changing icon. In this way, since it is notified that the changing icon has changed between the shape and the character, it is easy for the player to understand that the changing icon has changed.

  In the present embodiment, the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16 notify that the changing icon has changed, but the notification is a part of these various effect devices ( For example, any one or any two of the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16 may be used.

  Furthermore, in FIGS. 92 to 96, specific examples in which the throwing kiss notice is performed for the changing icon have been described. Similarly, the throwing kiss notice and the change in the display mode of the icon are also performed for the hold icon. Is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification of the change in the icon display mode is performed only when the icon shape does not change but the icon color changes, but the display mode also changes when the icon shape changes. It is also possible to notify the change. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the change in the icon display mode, and to suppress the reduction in the effect due to the change in the icon display mode.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, “power up 20%” is displayed in the change notification image HG, but this “20%” portion is based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change. It can also be made selectable. Further, the color and size of the change notification image HG can be changed instead of the “20%” portion based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change.

  Further, the notification of the change of the icon display mode is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the notification of the change in the icon display mode is performed for the change in the icon display mode performed through the action of throwing kiss by the character C3. For example, it can also be performed for a change in the display mode of the icon suddenly performed when the icon is shifted.

  Further, in this embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is performed based on the prior judgment result, but the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, or the special figure variation of the special figure judgment information subject to the throwing kiss notice. It is also possible to perform based on the pattern determination result.

  Further, in this embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed at the start of the change display of the effect symbol, but the execution timing of the throwing kiss notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the effect contents of the changing effect. can do. Other execution timings for throwing kiss notice include temporary stop or re-variation of pseudo-reams, so-called step-up notice step-up, advance to predetermined cut-in notice, dialogue notice, character appearance, or SP reach production It is possible to appropriately set a predetermined operation effect or the like by the effect accessory device 17 when executing the development effect to be performed, when the reach state is established, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, one heart is thrown toward one icon in one throwing kiss notice, and a notice is made as to whether or not the display mode changes once for one icon. However, with a single throwing kiss notice, multiple hearts will be blown toward one icon at the same time or at predetermined time intervals, and a notice will be given as to whether the display mode will change multiple times for one icon. May be performed. In this case, every time the icon display mode changes, it is also possible to notify the change of the icon display mode, and in response to one throwing kiss notice (after the last heart is skipped). ) It is also possible to collectively notify the change of the icon display mode once.

  Furthermore, it is also possible to make a notice as to whether or not the display mode changes for a plurality of icons by skipping a heart toward a plurality of icons in one throwing kiss notice. In this case, it is also possible to perform notification of changes in the icon display mode for all icons whose display mode has changed, and icon display modes for some icons whose display mode has changed. It is also possible to notify the change.

(Summary of pre-reading zone production, zone strike production, and zone sign production)
With reference to FIG. 97, an overview of the pre-read zone effect, the zone turn effect, and the zone precursor effect will be described.

  The pre-reading zone effect is a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot winning over one or more variable effects, and the zone hit effect is a notice effect that tells whether or not the look-ahead zone effect is executed, The special symbol is used in the variation display and stop display of the effect symbol. The zone precursor effect is a notice effect for suggesting or notifying execution of the pre-read zone effect, and is performed by displaying an icon in a pre-read zone effect notifying mode or a pre-read zone effect suggesting mode. In this embodiment, the look-ahead zone effect, the zone turn effect, and the zone sign effect are executed in the change effect in the effect mode A, and the look-ahead notice (continuous) is performed based on the pre-determination result indicated by the start opening prize designation command. Is a kind of notice effect).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97 (a-1), when the zone-turning success effect is executed in the effect symbol variation display (variation effect), the next effect symbol variation display starts. The pre-read zone production starts. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (a-2), when the zone turning failure effect is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (variation effect), the pre-reading zone from the start of the variation display of the next effect symbol. Production is not executed.

  Here, when the zone turning success effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 97 (b-1), when the changing effect is being performed, first, “look ahead” as the left symbol of the left area of the display unit 140. The symbol stops, and then the “zone” symbol stops as the right symbol in the right area of the display unit 140, suggesting execution of the pre-reading zone effect. "The design stops. As described above, when all the special symbols (“prefetch” symbol, “zone” symbol, and “stop” symbol) set in advance are stopped, the “special symbol alignment” is performed, and the prefetch zone effect is executed. Informed.

  On the other hand, when the zone turning failure production 1 is executed as the zone turning failure production, as shown in FIG. 97 (b-2), when the variation production is performed, the “pre-read” design is first used as the left design. Will stop, then the “Zone” symbol will stop as the right symbol, and the “Inrush” symbol will stop as the middle symbol. A normal production symbol stops as a middle symbol. As described above, when only a part of the special symbols set in advance is stopped, “special symbols are not aligned”, and it is notified that the prefetch zone effect is not executed.

  In addition, when a special symbol appears as a zone turning effect, the normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed so far may be displayed in a reduced state in the upper right part of the display unit 140, for example. For example, if a special symbol appears while a normal effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the reduced normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in the upper right portion of the display unit 140. Then, when the variable display is finished and special symbol alignment or special symbol irregularity is performed, the same stop time (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment) as in the normal case is displayed in the upper right part of the display unit 140, The reduced normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 (effect symbols indicating a loss) are stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when the special symbol alignment or special symbol irregularity ends and a new variation display is started, the special symbol is deleted and the normal production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed while returning to the original size. It moves to the normal position in the part 140, and the variation display of the effect design is performed as usual.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 (c-1) and 97 (c-2), a change in the size of the changing icon performed in accordance with the zone turning effect will be described. In the present embodiment, the size of the changing icon increases in accordance with the stoppage of the special symbol performed as the zone turning effect.

  In the zone production success production, the size of the changing icon is increased by one step according to the stop of the “look ahead” symbol, and the size of the changing icon is further increased by one step according to the stop of the “zone” symbol. As the “rush” symbol stops, the size of the changing icon is further increased by one level to become the third level. When the zone-turning success effect is finished and the pre-reading zone effect is executed, the changing icon is maintained at the third size.

  On the other hand, in zone turning failure production 1, the size of the changing icon increases by one step according to the stop of the “look ahead” symbol, and the size of the changing icon increases by one step according to the stop of the “zone” symbol. In the second stage, the size of the changing icon returns to the original normal size due to the slip of the “rush” symbol.

  In this way, by gradually increasing the size of the changing icon that is easily noticed by the player, a sense of expectation for the pre-reading zone effect can be enhanced.

(Examples of pre-reading zone production, zone sign production, and zone sword production)
Next, examples of pre-read zone effects, zone precursor effects, and zone turn effects will be described.

  Here, when the number of the first special figure hold is “2”, a game ball enters the first start port 6 and a new first special figure hold is generated, and the first special figure hold is generated. Accordingly, the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and in the start opening winning process, the lookahead zone effect scenario No. “4” shown in FIG. 41 and the prelude effect scenario “14” shown in FIG. -3 ”and the icon display mode scenario“ 8 ”shown in FIG. 44 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), when the normal-type hold icons A40 to A42 are displayed on the first display portion 141a to the third display portion 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, an effect showing a loss is shown. When the symbol stop display is performed, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the change display timing of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A40 comes, the hold icons A40 to A42 are displayed as the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, While shifting to the 2nd display part 141b, the change display of an effect design is started. Since the hold icon A40 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A40 changes to the changing icon A40.

  Then, when the variation display of the effect symbol (variation effect) is being executed, a game ball enters the first start port 6, and a first special figure hold is newly generated, and the first special figure hold In response to the occurrence of the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and in the start opening winning time process, the pre-read zone effect scenario No “4” shown in FIG. 41 and the prelude effect scenario “14” shown in FIG. -3 ”is selected.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the hold icon A43 corresponding to the newly generated first special figure hold is displayed in the third special mode 41 and shown in FIG. 98 (d). As described above, the hold icons A41 and A42 and the changing icon A40 corresponding to the preceding hold for the newly generated first special figure hold change to the third special mode 41 (corresponding to the hold icon change notice).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), when the variation display of the effect symbol started in FIG. 98 (b) is stopped and displayed by a combination of effect symbols indicating a loss, as shown in FIG. 99 (b). In addition, the changing icon A40 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), when the change display of the production symbol corresponding to the hold icon A41 is started, the hold icons A41 to A43 are changed to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit, respectively. The display mode of the icon A43, which is the execution target of the pre-read zone effect, is changed to the third special mode 21 (pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 2) and the pre-read zone effect is not executed. The display modes of the icons A41 and A42 are changed to the third special mode 51 (prefetch zone effect suggesting mode 2). Since the hold icon A41 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A41 changes to the changing icon A41.

  Here, when a game ball enters the first start opening 6, since the icon is already displayed in the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 2, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), the hold icon ( The zone effect non-target icon) A44 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the same pre-read zone effect suggesting mode 2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), the change display of the effect design corresponding to the changing icon A41 is the effect design immediately before the change display of the effect design corresponding to the icon A43 which is the zone effect target icon. Since it is a variable display, the zone turning effect is executed during the variable display of the effect symbol.

  Here, since the zone-rolling effect is determined to be a zone-rolling success effect, as shown in FIGS. 100 (a) to 100 (c), as the zone-rolling effect, a “look ahead” symbol, a “zone” symbol, In addition, it is notified that the “rushing” symbols are temporarily stopped in order and the pre-read zone effect is executed. Here, the size of the changing icon A42 gradually increases in accordance with the stop of the “look ahead” symbol, the stop of the “zone” symbol, and the stop of the “rush” symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the changing display of the effect symbols started in FIG. 99 (c) is completely stopped and displayed with the special symbols, the changing icon A41 is deleted. The In addition, you may make it stop-display sequentially in the state which reduced the normal production | presentation symbol to the position of the upper right part of the display part 140 of the image display apparatus 14 corresponding to each stop display of three special symbols. It will be a combination of production patterns that will be lost.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the change display of the production symbol corresponding to the hold icon A42 is started, a prefetch zone background image HK indicating the prefetch zone is displayed, and the BGM and illumination mode are displayed. Is switched from the effect mode A to the one dedicated to the prefetch zone effect, and the prefetch zone effect (corresponding to the continuous notice effect) is started. In other words, the hold icon change notice and the continuous notice effect are shifted from the start time, but the execution time is overlapped.

  In addition, each of the hold icons A42 to A44 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b. Here, since the hold icon A42 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A42 changes to the changing icon A42.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the hold icon A43, which is the execution target of the prefetch zone effect, is changed to the third special mode 31 (prefetch zone effect notification mode), and the changing icon A42 and the hold icon A44, which are not executed for the prefetch zone effect, are displayed. Changes to the third special mode 61 (prefetch zone effect notification mode). The size of the changing icon A42 is the same as that in the third stage.

  Here, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6, since the icon is already displayed in the pre-read zone effect notification mode, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the hold icon (zone The production non-target icon) A45 is displayed on the third display unit 141c in the same prefetch zone production notification mode 6.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), when the change display of the effect symbol started in FIG. 101 (b) is stopped and displayed with the effect symbol indicating the loss, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. The changing icon A42 of the third special mode 31 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), when the change display (change effect) of the effect symbol corresponding to the hold icon A43 related to the start opening winning designation command that has generated the prefetch zone effect is started, the hold icon Each of A43 to A45 shifts to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b, and the prefetch zone effect continues. Since the hold icon A43 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A43 is changed to the changing icon A43.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), when the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped and the reach state is established in the variation display of the effect symbols, the display mode of the changing icon A43 is changed to the third special mode 33. As a result, the color of the main silhouette portion turns red, and the pre-reading zone effect continues.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), when it develops to a predetermined SP reach production, the hold icons A44 and A45 that have been displayed until immediately before are hidden, and the display mode of the changing icon A43 is third. It changes to the special mode 34, the color of the main silhouette part becomes a zebra pattern, and the look-ahead zone effect ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the stop display of the effect symbol (“7” set) indicating the jackpot winning is performed, the silhouettes of the seven people related to the changing icon A43 are notified of the jackpot winning notification. As a movement, raise your hands and express your joy.

  As described above, when the prefetch zone effect is executed, before the prefetch zone effect is executed, the zone sign effect that suggests the execution of the prefetch zone effect is made by changing the icon display mode to the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode. Is done. Here, in the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode, the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 (the third special mode 1, the third special mode 4) and the expectation for the execution of the prefetch zone effect are higher than the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1. A pre-read zone effect suggesting mode 2 (third special mode 2 and third special mode 5) is provided. In the following description, the zone precursor effect according to the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 1 is referred to as “zone precursor effect 1”, and the zone precursor effect according to the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 2 is referred to as “zone precursor effect 2”.

  The pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 1 is a dedicated icon display mode for the zone sign effect 1, and the letter “? Zone?” Is added as the icon display mode, and the number of people silhouettes is three. In addition, the pre-read zone effect suggestion mode 2 is also a dedicated icon display mode for the zone sign effect 2, and the letter “Δ zone Δ” is added as the icon display mode, and the number of people silhouettes is composed of five people. Yes. Therefore, the player suggests that the prefetch zone effect is executed by looking at the icons (the hold icon and the changing icon) displayed in the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2. Since it is possible to easily recognize that the sign effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in effect.

  When the pre-reading zone is being executed, the display mode of the icon is changed to the pre-reading zone effect informing mode (third special mode 3 and third special mode 6) to notify that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed. A zone notification effect is performed.

  The pre-read zone effect informing mode is an icon display mode dedicated to the zone informing effect, and the letter “○ zone ○” is added as the icon display mode, and the number of people silhouettes is composed of seven people. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the zone notification effect is being executed by looking at the icons (the hold icon and the changing icon) displayed in the pre-read zone effect notification mode. Decrease in effect can be prevented.

  In addition, zone sign effects 1 and 2 and zone notification effects are provided as effects indicating the pre-read zone execution expectation, and the pre-read zone execution expectation indicated by each effect is the zone sign effect 1 <zone sign effect 2 <zone. It is a notice production. Since the icon display mode related to the zone sign effect 1, the icon display mode related to the zone sign effect 2, and the icon display mode related to the zone notification effect are different from each other, the player can easily set the prefetch zone execution expectation degree. Can be recognized.

  In the present embodiment, there is one kind of prefetch zone effect, but it is also possible to provide a plurality of types of prefetch zone effects that have different jackpot winning expectations. In this case, a first look-ahead zone effect and a second look-ahead zone effect that has a higher win-winning expectation than the first look-ahead zone effect are provided, and the second look-ahead zone effect passes through the first look-ahead zone effect. Thus, there may be a case where the first prefetch zone effect is executed in an expansive manner and a case where the first prefetch zone effect is executed without going through the first prefetch zone effect. The type of the pre-read zone effect to be executed can be suggested by the type of the zone sign effect.

  The icons according to the third special aspect are the same regardless of the type of the shape of the main silhouette portion, but the color of the main silhouette portion differs depending on the type, and the jackpot winning expectation differs depending on the color. In addition, the icons related to the third special mode differ depending on the type of characters attached to the number of people in the sub-silhouette part (“? Zone?”, “△ Zone △”, “○ Zone ○”). The icons according to the third special mode have different look-ahead execution expectation levels depending on the number of people in the sub-silhouette portion and the attached characters.

  Therefore, when the pre-read zone suggestion effect and the pre-read zone notification effect are being executed, if the player pays attention to the display mode of the icon, the player can recognize not only the pre-read zone execution expectation but also the big win winning expectation. Therefore, the fun of gaming is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the elements constituting the third special modes 1 to 6 indicate the prefetch execution expectation degree and the jackpot winning expectation degree, but the suggested contents are not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. it can. For example, the degree of expectation that a specific effect such as SP reach, SPSP reach, or pseudo-ream will be executed depending on the elements constituting the third special modes 1 to 6, and a specific type of jackpot such as a probable jackpot or long hit is executed. It can also be used to suggest expected expectations.

Furthermore, the prefetching execution expectation degree and the jackpot winning expectation degree are suggested or notified by the display mode of the icon, but these suggestions or notifications are not the display mode of the icon, for example, the display mode of the effect design or the effect for the effect It can also be performed by other specific effects such as the operating mode of the movable portion 17A of the device 17. In addition, although the zone sign effect is performed on the icon, it can also be performed using other images such as a background image and effect symbols displayed on the display unit 140. Further, the zone sign effect can be performed not by the image display device 14 but by using other effect devices such as the audio output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, and the effect accessory device 17.

  Further, the number of contents to be suggested is not limited to the embodiment depending on the elements constituting the icon display mode, and can be set as appropriate. In addition, the icon shape, size, operation mode, and the like can be appropriately set as elements constituting the icon display mode that suggests a predetermined matter.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-read zone effect, the zone precursor effect, and the zone notification effect are performed based on the prior determination result, but the special figure determination that is the target of the pre-read zone effect, the zone precursor effect, and the zone notification effect. It is also possible to perform based on information jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, or special symbol fluctuation pattern determination result.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the prefetch zone effect is executed at the start of the variation display of the effect symbol, and the zone precursor effect and the zone notification effect are executed at the time of winning or holding shift, the execution timing of these effects is It is not restricted to this, It can set suitably according to the production content of a fluctuation production. Other execution timings of these effects include, for example, temporary stop or re-variation in a pseudo-ream, so-called step-up notice step-up, predetermined cut-in notice, dialogue notice, character appearance, or super reach It is possible to appropriately set a predetermined operation effect or the like by the effect accessory device 17 when executing the development effect to be performed, when the reach state is established, or the like.

  In this embodiment, when the pre-reading zone effect is started, the zone turning success effect is always executed before the start of the pre-reading zone effect. The pre-reading zone effect may be executed suddenly at the start of or during the start of re-variable display in the effect.

(Example of directing step-up notices)
An example of the effect of the continuous step-up notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105.

  Here, in the effect mode A (normal game state), when the start step winning prize process corresponding to the hold icon A13 is finally selected, the continuous step-up notice effect scenario scenario “14” shown in FIG. 46A is selected. An example of the production will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the normal hold icons A11 to A13 are displayed on the first display portion 141a to the third display portion 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, an effect showing a loss is shown. When the symbol stop display is performed, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the change display timing of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A11 is reached, the hold icons A11 to A13 are displayed as the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, While shifting to the 2 display part 141b, the change display of an effect design is performed and a change production is started. Since the hold icon A11 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A11 is changed to the changing icon A11.

  At this time, the first step effect of the continuous step-up notice effect is started, and the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 moves to the first effect position (movement width: small) located in front of the image display device 14. A plurality of LEDs provided in the interior emit light in blue while performing an effect operation, and a blue effect image EFG is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

  Then, when an effect period (for example, 3 seconds) of the first step effect elapses, the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 returns to the initial position (standby position) and the light emission of the internal LED stops, and the image The effect image EFG displayed on the display device 14 is also deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), when the effect time of the change effect elapses and the combination of effect symbols indicating the loss is stopped on the image display device 14, the change icon display area 142 is displayed. The changing icon A11 that has been changed is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (d), when the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A12 comes, the hold icons A12 to A13 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a. At the same time, the effect symbol variation display is started. Since the hold icon A12 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A12 changes to the changing icon A12.

  At this time, the second step effect of the continuous step-up notice effect is started, and the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 moves to the second effect position (movement width: middle) located in front of the image display device 14. A plurality of LEDs provided in the interior emit light in green while performing an effect operation, and a green effect image EFG is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

  Then, when an effect period (for example, 3 seconds) of the second step effect elapses, the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 returns to the initial position (standby position) and the light emission of the internal LED stops, and the image The effect image EFG displayed on the display device 14 is also deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (e), when the effect time of the change effect elapses and the combination of effect symbols indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, the change icon display area 142 is displayed. The changing icon A11 that has been changed is deleted. When a game ball enters the first starting port 6 at this timing and a new first special figure hold occurs, a hold icon A14 corresponding to the first special figure hold is additionally displayed on the second display unit 141b. The

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (f), the hold icons A13 to A14 are displayed in the changing icon display area at the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A13 that is the target of the continuous step-up notice effect. 142, the first display unit 141a is shifted to, and the effect symbol variation display is started. Since the hold icon A13 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A13 changes to the changing icon A13.

  At this time, the third step effect of the continuous step-up notice effect is started, and the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 moves to the third effect position (movement width: large) located in front of the image display device 14. A plurality of LEDs provided in the interior emit light in red while performing an effect operation, and a red effect image EFG is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

  And when the production period (for example, 3 seconds) of the third step production elapses, the movable portion 17A of the production effect device 17 returns to the initial position (standby position) and the light emission of the internal LED stops, and the image The effect image EFG displayed on the display device 14 is also deleted, and the continuous step-up notice effect ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), when the effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped in the same symbol in the effect symbol variation display, the reach state is established and the normal reach effect is started. At this time, the variable display continues for the special special symbol TZ4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the start of the normal reach production, a transition production (development production) that suggests development to the SP / SPSP reach production is started. The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 move to the upper right part of the display unit of the image display device 14 in a reduced state and change to the effect symbols of the second display mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), when a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses from the start of the transition effect (development effect), an effect image EG in which the teammate character and the enemy character battle is displayed. SP reach production starts. At this time, the variable display of the effect symbol TZ2 and the special effect symbol TZ4 continues.

  As described above, the step effect is performed so as to step up to one of the first to fourth steps over one or a plurality of variable displays by the continuous step-up notice effect, and the degree of expectation of winning the big win Since the notification is made, it is possible to improve the interest of the game with the expectation of the player.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the production period of the continuous step-up notice effect was the same in the first to fourth step effects, the production period of each step effect may be different. In that case, the first step effect <the second step effect <the third step effect <the fourth step effect, or vice versa. Further, the effect period of any two or three step effects may be made the same, and the remaining effect periods of the step effects may be made longer or shorter.

  In addition, instead of sequentially executing the first to fourth step effects, for example, the step effect is skipped by one step or a plurality of steps, such as executing the third step effect after the first step effect. The continuous step-up notice effect may be executed in the manner described above. Further, when the final step effects are the same, it is preferable to set the jackpot expectation degree when the step skipping is higher than when the step skipping is not performed.

  In addition, in the first to fourth step effects, the movable portion 17A of the effect accessory device 17 is moved to any one of the first effect position to the third effect position, but the same in all step effects. You may make it move to an effect position.

(Production example of chance eye notice effect)
An example of the chance eye notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the effect mode A (normal game state), in the start opening winning process corresponding to the hold icon A13, the chance eye notice effect scenario No. “9” shown in FIG. 46B is finally selected. A production example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (a), when the normal hold icons A11 to A13 are displayed on the first display portion 141a to the third display portion 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, an effect showing a loss is shown. When the symbol stop display is performed, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), at the start timing of the variable symbol display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A11, the hold icons A11 to A13 are changed to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, While shifting to the 2 display part 141b, the change display of an effect design is performed and a change production is started. Since the hold icon A11 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A11 is changed to the changing icon A11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), the chance eye notice effect is started when a predetermined time elapses after the change effect is started and the effect symbol is temporarily stopped, and the effect symbol TZ1 and the effect symbol are displayed. The blue color effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the order of TZ3 and effect symbol TZ2, and a chance that is a combination of effect symbols of the same color is derived.

  At this time, the white effect image EFG is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and when the predetermined time elapses from the temporary stop of the effect symbols, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 are stopped and displayed. The production ends, and the changing icon A11 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), when the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A12 comes, the hold icons A12 to A13 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a. At the same time, a variation display of the effect symbol is performed and the variation effect is started. Since the hold icon A12 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A12 changes to the changing icon A12.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (e), when a predetermined time elapses after the start of the change effect and the effect symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect symbol TZ 1, the effect symbol TZ 3, and the effect symbol TZ 2 are in this order. Thus, the effect design of the green color is temporarily stopped, and a chance eye that is a combination of the effect design of the same color is derived.

  At this time, the white effect image EFG is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and when the predetermined time elapses from the temporary stop of the effect symbols, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special effect symbol TZ4 are stopped and displayed. The production ends, and the changing icon A12 displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted. When a game ball enters the first starting port 6 at this timing and a new first special figure hold occurs, a hold icon A14 corresponding to the first special figure hold is additionally displayed on the second display unit 141b. The

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (f), when the change display timing of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A13 that is the target of the chance eye notice effect is reached, the hold icons A13 to A14 are displayed in the changing icon display area 142. In addition to shifting to the first display unit 141a, a variation display of the effect symbol is performed and the variation effect is started. Since the hold icon A13 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon A13 changes to the changing icon A13. In addition, since the effect performed after this is the same as the effect example of FIG. 105 mentioned above, description here is omitted.

  As described above, winning chances can be won by chance eyes of the same color being derived and displayed over one or more varying effects, or by stepping up and displaying the chance of different colors. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by encouraging the player's expectation just before the end of the variation production.

  In the present embodiment, the same color is used for the effect image displayed around the effect symbol when the chance eye is derived and displayed in the chance eye notice effect, regardless of which chance eye is derived and displayed. However, you may make it change according to the color of the production | presentation symbol which comprises a chance eye.

  Also, instead of stepping up the order of the design symbols that make up the chance eye in the order of blue design, green design, and red design, it is a step skipping mode that skips the color of the design that makes up the chance eye by one step. You may make it perform a chance eye notice effect. Further, when the color of the last chance eye is the same, the expectation of jackpot when the step skip is performed is preferably set to be higher than when the step skip is not performed.

  In addition, in the chance eye notice effect that is executed over a plurality of fluctuating effects, the chance eye notice effect is not executed so that the color of the effect symbol constituting the chance eye is stepped up. May be determined and displayed at random. Moreover, although the chance eyes were constituted by normal production symbols, the chance eyes may be constituted by a combination of exclusive production symbols, or the chance eyes may be constituted by one or two special production symbols. Also good.

(Examples of directing lines)
With reference to FIG. 107, an example of the effect of the dialogue notice effect will be described.

  Here, in the start mode winning process corresponding to the hold icon B23 in the production mode B (high-probability short-time gaming state), the dialog advance notice scenario No. “7” shown in FIG. 48A is finally selected. An example of an effect when the icon final display mode “second special mode 21” shown in 52 is selected will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the normal hold icons B21 to B22 are displayed on the first display portion 143a and the second display portion 143b of the second hold icon display area 143, and the line notification is displayed on the third display portion 143c. When the hold icon B23 to be directed is displayed in the first special mode and the effect symbol indicating the loss is displayed, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted. Is done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), at the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B21, the hold icons B21 to B23 are changed to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 143a, While shifting to the 2 display part 143b, the change display of an effect design is performed and a change effect is started. Since the hold icon B21 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon B21 is changed to the changing icon B21.

  At this time, the first serif effect of the serif notice effect is started, the character C3 is displayed in the lower left part of the display unit of the image display device 14, and the speech (black character) “Are?” Is displayed in the balloon, and the audio output device 15 Will output the sound of “That?”. And if the production period (for example, 1.5 second) of the 1st line production passes, the character and balloon currently displayed on image display device 14 will be erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), when the effect time of the change effect elapses and the combination of effect symbols indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, the change icon display area 142 is displayed. The changing icon B21 that has been changed is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), when the change display timing of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B 22 comes, the hold icons B 22 to B 23 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 143 a. At the same time, the effect symbol variation display is started. Since the hold icon B22 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon B22 is changed to the changing icon B22.

  At this time, the second dialogue production of the dialogue announcement production is started, the character C3 is displayed in the lower left part of the display unit of the image display device 14, and the words “black” are displayed in the balloon, and the voice output device 15 "Maybe" sound is output. And if the production period (for example, 1.5 second) of the 2nd line production passes, the character and balloon currently displayed on image display device 14 will be erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), when the effect time of the change effect elapses and the combination of the effect symbols indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. The changing icon B22 that has been changed is deleted. When a game ball enters the second start port 7 at this timing and a second special figure hold occurs, a hold icon B24 corresponding to the second special figure hold is additionally displayed on the second display unit 143b. The

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (f), when the change display timing of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B23 that is the subject of the line notice is reached, the hold icons B23 to B24 are changed to the changing icon display area 142, While shifting to the 1 display part 143a, the change display of a production | presentation symbol is started. Since the hold icon B23 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon B23 changes to the changing icon B23.

  At this time, the third dialogue production of the dialogue advance notice production is started, the character C3 is displayed at the lower left part of the display unit of the image display device 14, and the “hot!” Dialogue (red character) is displayed in the balloon, and the audio output device. 15 will output a “hot!” Sound. Further, it is notified that the display mode of the changing icon B23 is changed from the first special mode to the second special mode 21 and the generation of the production more than the SP reach production is confirmed. Then, when the effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) of the third line effect elapses, the character and the balloon displayed on the image display device 14 are deleted. In addition, since the effect performed after this is the same as the effect example of FIG. 105 mentioned above, description here is omitted.

  As described above, the expectation of winning a big hit is that various serif effects are executed over one or a plurality of fluctuating effects by the serif notice effect or the color of the serif displayed on the image display device 14 is stepped up. Since the degree is notified, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by encouraging the player's expectation.

  In the present embodiment, the expectation level of the jackpot winning is suggested by the content and color of the lines displayed on the image display device 14 in the serif notice effect, but the expectation degree of the jackpot winning is determined by either one. You may make it alert | report.

  In addition, when the serif notice effect is being executed, the changing icon change notice is executed so that the display state of the changing icon changes after the serif effect is executed in the changing effect that is the target of the serif notice effect. It is preferable. If it does in this way, it will become possible to prevent that the expectation with respect to a line production will fade by the change icon notice during change.

(Example of effect notice effect)
An example of the effect notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the effect mode B (high-probability short-time gaming state), the effect notice effect scenario scenario “11” shown in FIG. 48B is finally selected in the start opening winning process corresponding to the hold icon B22. An example of the effect when the icon final display mode “second special mode 22” shown in 52 is selected will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the normal hold icon B21 is displayed on the first display unit 143a of the second hold icon display area 143, and the hold icon B22 that is the target of the effect announcement effect is displayed on the second display unit 143b. Is displayed in the first special mode, if the effect symbol indicating the loss is stopped, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B21 comes, the hold icons B21 to B22 are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 143a. At the same time, a variation display of the effect symbol is performed and the variation effect is started. Since the hold icon B21 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon B21 is changed to the changing icon B21.

  At this time, the first effect effect of the effect notice effect is started, and the blue effect image EFG is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 which are starting to display the fluctuation display and swinging. Sound effects are output.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), when the effect period (for example, 1 second) of the effect effect has elapsed since the start of the first effect effect, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed. The effect image is deleted and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start scrolling. When a game ball enters the second start port 7 at this timing and a second special figure hold occurs, a hold icon B23 corresponding to the second special figure hold is additionally displayed on the second display unit 143b. The

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), when the effect time of the change effect elapses and the combination of the effect symbols indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142. The changing icon B21 that has been changed is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (e), when it is the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B22 that is the target of the effect notice effect, the hold icons B22 to B23 are displayed in the changing icon display area 142, While shifting to the 1st display part 143a, the fluctuation | variation display of an effect design is started. Since the hold icon B22 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the hold icon B22 is changed to the changing icon B22.

  At this time, the second effect effect of the effect notice effect is started, and the green effect image EFG is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 which are starting to change display and swinging. Sound effects are output. Further, it is notified that the display mode of the changing icon B22 is changed from the first special mode to the second special mode 22 and that the expectation of jackpot is high.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (f), when the effect period (for example, 1 second) of the effect effect has elapsed since the start of the second effect effect, it is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. The effect image is deleted and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start scrolling. In addition, since the effect performed after this is the same as the effect example of FIG. 105 mentioned above, description here is omitted.

  As described above, the effect image is displayed around the effect symbol over one or more variable displays by the effect notice effect, and the expected degree of winning the big win by stepping up the color of the displayed effect image Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by encouraging the player's expectation immediately after the start of the variation effect.

  In this embodiment, the effect image displayed around the effect symbol in the effect notice effect is not stepped up in the order of the blue effect, the green effect, the red effect, and the rainbow effect, but the color of the effect image is set to 1. You may make it perform an effect notice effect in the step skipping aspect which skips a step or multiple steps. Further, when the color of the final effect image is the same, it is preferable to set the jackpot expectation degree when the step skipping is performed higher than when the step skipping is not performed.

  In addition, in the effect notice effect, the effect image having the same color is always executed instead of executing the effect notice effect so that the color of the effect image displayed around the effect symbol is stepped up over a plurality of variation effects. May be displayed.

  In addition, it is preferable to execute the changing icon change notice so that the display state of the changing icon changes after the effect effect is executed in the changing effect that is the target of the effect notice effect. In this way, it is possible to prevent the expectation with respect to the effect effect from fading due to the changing icon change notice during the change.

(Time chart before and after the certainty production and customer waiting production)
The time charts before and after the positive effect and the customer waiting effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 at the timing T0 and the start condition is satisfied, the image display device 14 starts the change effect and enters the normal change effect period. In the device 16, a light emission effect during fluctuation is started.

  At the timing of T1, the image display device 14 starts the normal reach effect and enters the normal reach effect period, and the effect lighting device 16 starts the varying light emission effect corresponding to the normal reach effect.

  At the timing of T2, the SP reach effect is started in the image display device 14 and an SP reach effect period is reached, and the sound output device 15 outputs one notification sound constituting the correct effect, and the effect illumination device 16 and the handle illumination device. In 33, the correct light emission effect that constitutes the correct effect is started.

  At the timing of T3, the image display device 14 starts the result derivation effect for deriving the result of the SP reach effect, and the result derivation effect period, and the effect accessory device 17 notifies that the result of the SP reach effect is a big hit. To perform a jackpot notification operation.

  At the timing of T4, when the variation effect that has been a big hit ends, the correct lighting effect ends in the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33, and the big hit effect (opening effect) starts in the image display device 14. The period lighting unit 16 starts the big hit light emission effect.

  At the timing of T5, when the jackpot presentation period ends, the number of first and second special figure reservations is “0”, so a waiting state for a customer in which the variable presentation and jackpot presentation are not executed is started. An effect standby period (for example, 30 seconds) is reached, and the image display device 14 displays a customer standby effect standby screen, and the effect lighting device 16 starts a light emission effect during standby corresponding to the customer standby effect standby period.

  The waiting light emitting effects are the above-described varying light emitting effects (particularly during various reach effects), the jackpot light emitting effects, and the lamp / LED light emission modes of the effect lighting device 16 rather than the customer waiting light emitting effects described later. More specifically, the light emission effect is less with blinking movement (moving lighting) and / or luminance change (including lighting / extinguishing).

  At the timing of T6, when the waiting time effect waiting period ends, it becomes a waiting time effect (demonstration effect) period (for example, 30 seconds) for executing the waiting time effect, and the image display device 14 introduces a gaming machine. The customer waiting demonstration display (demonstration movie) is started, and the lighting device 16 for production and the handle lighting device 33 start a light emitting effect during customer waiting corresponding to the customer waiting effect period.

  In addition, the customer waiting light emission effect is at least one illumination device (this embodiment) among a plurality of illumination devices (a plurality of game board illumination devices and a plurality of glass door illumination devices) constituting the effect illumination device 16. Then, in the glass door illumination device) and the handle illumination device 33, the above-described accurate light emission effect and the pseudo-light emission effect in which the light emission mode (light emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) is the same or similar are performed. Note that when this pseudo-light emission effect is executed, unlike the case where the above-mentioned accurate light emission effect is executed, the output of one notification sound from the audio output device 15 is not performed.

  At a timing of T7, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the start of the customer waiting effect period, the pseudo-accurate light effect performed by the one lighting device and the handle lighting device 33 is finished, and another lighting is performed. The customer waiting light emission effect similar to the device is started. The waiting light emission effect is a light emitting effect in which the lighting mode of the lamps / LEDs of the effect lighting device 16 changes more than the waiting light emission effect described above, and it is easy to attract the player's attention. .

  When a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the start of the customer waiting effect at the timing of T8, the customer waiting effect period ends, and the image display device 14 displays the customer waiting effect standby screen, and the effect lighting device 16 Then, the waiting light emitting effect corresponding to the waiting time effect waiting period is started.

(Directed production example)
Next, with reference to FIG. 110 and FIG. 111, an example of the effect of the certain effect will be described. 110A, 110B, and 111A correspond to the timings T0, T1, and T2 in FIG. 109, respectively, and FIG. 111B illustrates the period between T3 and T4 in FIG. Corresponds to timing.

  First, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), a changing effect corresponding to the changing icon A43 is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the lamp / LED is red or blue in the effect lighting device 16. In the non-reach state light emission pattern composed of the normal light emission colors, a light emission effect during fluctuation is performed. At this time, the handle lighting device 33 is turned off.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 temporarily stops the symbol “7” in the left region and the right region, and the normal reach effect is executed. In No. 16, the light emission effect during fluctuation is performed with a light emission pattern for normal reach in which the lamp / LED is configured with a normal light emission color (light emission mode) such as red or yellow. At this time, the handle lighting device 33 is turned off.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), the display image 140 of the image display device 14 displays the effect image EG in which the teammate character and the enemy character battle, and the SP reach effect is started. At this timing, the winning effect is executed, and the changing icon display area 142 of the display unit 140 displays the changing icon of the second special mode 15 in which the jackpot is determined as the determined display effect, and the audio output device 15 outputs a notification sound of “cure cuin”, and the lighting device 16 (specifically, the glass door lighting device) and the handle lighting device 33 produce a display color of a plurality of lamps / LEDs with a time difference. The exact light emission effect is started with the exact light emission pattern which is a special light emission mode that appears to emit light in a rainbow color by changing.

  In addition to the display change to the second special mode 15 in the icon change notice as described above, the rainbow effect (SU4) and the line notice in the continuous SU notice effect may be included as the accurate display effects executed in the image display device 14. “Confirm!” In the production, rainbow effect, etc. in the effect notice production.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in the left region, the center region, and the right region, respectively, and the special drawing lottery result is notified (determined). Equivalent to a kind of display effect). At this time, the output of one notification sound from the audio output device 15 is stopped, but the direct lighting effect is continued in the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33.

  As described above, since the accurate production is executed at a predetermined timing during the variation production, the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the accurate production is executed can be obtained. Interest is improved. In addition to the single notification sound from the audio output device 15, the lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33 perform a certain light emission effect by a special light emission mode (rainbow light emission) different from the normal light emission mode. Therefore, it is possible to effectively appeal to the player that a big hit will be made.

(Example of pseudo-realistic lighting effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, an example of a pseudo-accurate light emission effect will be described. 112 (a) and 112 (b) correspond to the timing between T4 and T5 and the timing between T6 and T7 in FIG. 109, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 with the effect symbols stopped and displayed as the customer waiting effect standby screen. In the effect lighting device 16, the lamp / LED performs a light emission effect during standby with a light emission pattern for waiting for a customer effect made up of a normal light emission color such as white or yellow. At this time, the handle lighting device 33 is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 executes a demo display for waiting for a customer, and the sound output device 15 outputs a BGM and a sound effect for waiting for a customer. In the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33, a pseudo-accurate light emission effect is executed with a special light emission pattern that is a special light emission mode in which the lamp / LED appears to emit light in rainbow colors. This pseudo-accurate light emission effect is a light emission effect that is the same as or similar to the above-described accurate light emission effect and the light emission mode (light emission color, light emission pattern, etc.).

  As described above, the pseudo-accurate light emitting effect for causing the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33 to emit light in the same or similar manner as the correct light emitting effect (determined light emitting effect) during the customer waiting effect period (during the customer waiting demonstration display). Since it is executed, it is possible to sufficiently attract the player's interest in the waiting state of the customer (to sufficiently increase the game motivation).

(Modified example of time chart before and after the certainty production and the customer waiting production)
A modified example of the time chart before and after the positive effect and the customer waiting effect will be described with reference to FIG. In this modified example, the pseudo-accurate effect is not executed in synchronization with the start of the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration display), but is executed in the middle of the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration display). It is executed in synchronization with a predetermined display effect. Note that the timing from T0 to T5 is the same as that in the above embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  At the timing of T6, when the customer waiting effect waiting period ends, it becomes a customer waiting effect period (for example, 30 seconds) for executing the customer waiting effect, and the image display device 14 starts a normal demonstration display for waiting for the customer, The effect lighting device 16 starts a light emission effect during customer waiting corresponding to the customer waiting effect period. Note that the customer waiting light emission effect at this time is not a pseudo-accurate light emission effect, and the effect lighting device 16 emits light in a normal light emission color (light emission mode).

  At a timing of T7, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the start of the customer-waiting normal demo display, the normal demo display executed in the image display device 14 simulates the SP reach effect in the variable effect. The display is switched to a special demonstration display for waiting for a customer (an effect at the timing at which the actual light emission effect is actually executed), and a plurality of lighting devices (game board lighting device, glass door lighting device) constituting the lighting device 16 for the effect are displayed. In at least a specific lighting device (in this embodiment, a glass door lighting device) and the handle lighting device 33, the above-described accurate light emission effect and the light emission mode (light emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) are the same or similar and a pseudo accurate light emission effect. Is done.

  When a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the start of the pseudo-accuracy light emission effect at the timing of T8, the pseudo-accuracy light emission effect executed by the specific illumination device and the handle illumination device 33 is terminated, and another illumination device. The light emission effect during waiting for customers is resumed. Note that the waiting light emission effect is a light emission effect in which there are more changes in the light emission modes of the lamps and LEDs of the effect lighting device 16 than the above-described waiting light emission effect.

  When a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the start of the customer waiting effect at the timing of T9, the customer waiting effect period ends, and the image display device 14 displays the customer waiting effect standby screen, and the effect lighting device 16 Then, the waiting light emitting effect corresponding to the waiting time effect waiting period is started.

(Example of production of pseudo-accurate lighting effect in a modified example)
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, an example of the pseudo-accurate light emission effect in the modification will be described. 114A and 114B correspond to the timings T6 and T7 in FIG. 113, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (a), a normal demonstration display for waiting for a customer is executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and a BGM or a sound effect for waiting for a customer is output from the audio output device 15. In the lighting device 16 for production, the lamp / LED performs a light emission effect with a light emission pattern for a customer waiting effect constituted by a normal light emission color such as white or yellow. At this time, the handle lighting device 33 is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (b), the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 has a special demonstration display for waiting for a customer (here, an effect that simulates an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect that is a trigger for executing the correct effect). Display) and a sound waiting effect BGM and sound effects are output from the audio output device 15, and a plurality of lamps / LEDs emit rainbow colors in the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33. The pseudo-realistic light emission effect is executed with a special light emission pattern that is a special light emission mode that appears to be.

  As described above, the special demonstration display is executed during the waiting-to-stand production, and the special demonstration display is executed in the same manner as the production (SP reach production, SPSP reach production, etc.) that triggers the execution of the accurate production during the variation production. Since the pseudo-realistic light emission effect is executed at the start of the game, it is possible to sufficiently attract the player's interest (sufficiently increase the game motivation) in the customer waiting state. In addition, the correct light emission effect during the variation effect is also introduced, which makes it easier for the player to grasp the game performance.

  In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the BGM and the sound effect of the customer waiting effect are not output from the audio output device 15, but the BGM corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration display (normal demonstration display, special demonstration display) being executed. Or sound effects may be output.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the handle lighting device 33, the accurate light emission effect or the pseudo-accurate light emission effect is executed by the glass door lighting device which is one of the plurality of lighting devices constituting the lighting device 16 for the effect. However, in place of the glass door lighting device, the game lighting device that is one of a plurality of lighting devices constituting the performance lighting device 16 may execute the accurate lighting effect or the pseudo-light emitting effect. Then, the accurate light emission effect or the pseudo-accurate light emission effect may be executed by both the glass door lighting device and the game board lighting device.

  Moreover, you may make it perform an exact light emission effect and a pseudo-accurate light emission effect using only some illumination devices of the some illumination devices which comprise the illumination device for glass doors, and the illumination device for game boards. Further, the accurate light emission effect or the pseudo-accurate light emission effect may be executed only by the handle lighting device 33, or the accurate light emission effect or the pseudo-accurate light emission effect may be executed only by the effect lighting device 16.

  Also, the correct light emission effect and the pseudo-accurate light effect may be executed using different numbers of lighting devices instead of using the same number of lighting devices. In that case, the number of lighting devices with a smaller number of pseudo-accurate lighting effects than that of the actual lighting effects may be used, or the number of lighting devices with more pseudo-emergence lighting effects than that of the actual lighting effects may be used. . In the latter case, it is easy to attract the attention of players around.

  In addition, the pseudo-accurate light emission effect may be executed not by the effect lighting device 16 and the handle lighting device 33 but by only one of them. In that case, if the pseudo-light emission effect is executed with the lighting device 16 that is above the handle lighting device 33 and is conspicuous, the pseudo-realistic lighting effect is reduced without reducing the appeal power to the player while reducing power consumption. It is possible to execute a light emission effect.

  In addition, a reflector that changes the illumination mode (irradiation direction) by the lamps and LEDs and a rotary motor for rotating (operating) the reflector are provided inside the handle lighting device 33. Although the reflector is operated by driving, the reflector may not be operated without driving the rotary motor in the pseudo-accurate light emission effect. In addition, the reflector may be operated by driving the rotary motor in the accurate light emission effect and the pseudo accurate light emission effect.

  In addition, a dedicated effect device that emits light and / or operates during execution of the certain effect effect is arranged on the glass door Y2 and / or the game board 2, and the dedicated effect device is the same as the certain effect effect during the execution of the customer waiting effect. Or you may make it perform a pseudo-realistic effect by performing similar light emission and / or operation | movement.

  In addition, in order to make the accurate light emission effect and the pseudo-accurate light emission effect stand out from the light emission effect during the fluctuation, the luminance (illuminance) of the lamp / LED in the accurate light emission effect or the pseudo-accurate light emission effect You may make it higher than a brightness | luminance (illuminance).

  In addition, the pseudo-accurate light emission effect is not executed only once during the execution of the one customer waiting effect on the image display device 14, but may be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the one customer waiting effect. Alternatively, it may be executed during the customer waiting effect waiting period before the start of the customer waiting effect, or may be executed during execution of the customer waiting effect and during the customer waiting effect waiting period.

  Further, the execution time of the certain light emission effect is from the start timing of the certain light emission effect in the variation effect until the end of the variation effect, so the execution time value changes for each variation effect. For this reason, the execution time of the pseudo-accurate lighting effect may be longer or shorter than that of the accurate lighting effect, but the execution time of the actual lighting effect is fixed and the execution time of the pseudo-accurate lighting effect is the same. Also good.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the certain effect which alert | reports that the result of a variable display becomes a special result is performed before the result of a variable effect is displayed (derived), the result of a variable effect is shown. The correct effect may be executed when is displayed, or the correct effect may be executed before the result of the variable effect is displayed and when the result of the variable display is displayed. In this case, one sound notification sound is output in the accurate effect that is executed before the result of the variable effect is displayed, while one notification is output in the correct effect that is executed when the result of the variable effect is displayed. Sounds may not be output or may be output at a low rate.

(Right-handed display when a game ball enters the first start port 6 in the high-precision short-time game state)
FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a display example of a right-handed display when a game ball enters the first start port 6 of the left region 2AL in the high-probability short-time game state.

  In the effect image 1901 before the game ball enters the first starting port 6 of the left region 2AL in the high-probability short-time gaming state, as shown in FIG. The display of the first right-handed image KMG1 is maintained as the specific notification image for notifying the user.

  Here, the first right-handed image KMG1 is based on the result of the special symbol lottery performed by entering the game ball into the first start port 6 or the second start port 7, and the high-probability short game state or the low-probability short game It is displayed on the display unit 140 when the game state is changed to the state or when the execution of the jackpot game (round game) is started.

  Specifically, the first right-handed image KMG1 displayed during the high-probability short-time gaming state is obtained by performing “first right-handed notification” based on the processing in steps S1700-3 to S1700-5 shown in FIG. The display on the image display device 14 is started when the game state is changed to the high-accuracy and short game state by being incorporated in the image of the high-probability and short game state effect executed by the control board 105. The first right-handed image KMG1 is erased from the image display device 14 when the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state by the processing in steps S1700-10 to S1700-12 shown in FIG.

  Further, the first right-handed image KMG1 (ZMG in FIG. 82 (c)) displayed during the low-probability short game state is also based on the processing in steps S1700-3 to S1700-5 shown in FIG. The first right-handed notification ”is incorporated into the effect image of the low-accuracy short game state executed by the image control board 105, and the display on the image display device 14 is displayed when the game state is changed to the low-accuracy short game state. Be started. The first right-handed image KMG1 (ZMG) is erased from the image display device 14 when the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state by the processing in steps S1700-10 to S1700-12 shown in FIG.

  Further, the first right-handed image KMG1 (OMG in FIG. 82 (d)) displayed during the jackpot game round is also based on the processing of steps S1700-3 to S1700-5 shown in FIG. The “1 right-handed notification” is incorporated into a round effect image of the jackpot game executed by the image control board 105, and display on the image display device 14 is started at the start of the round effect. Then, the first right-handed image KMG1 (OMG) is erased from the image display device 14 at the end of the round effect by the processing of steps S1700-10 to S1700-12 shown in FIG.

  Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the opening is performed by the data output process of step S1900 based on the opening effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in the opening effect pattern determination process of step S1322. The opening effect of the jackpot game is executed by the image control board 105 that has received the effect pattern designation command. In the opening effect of the jackpot game, in order to suggest to the player the direction of the game ball firing in the jackpot game, for example, a character image “Please aim right!” “Pre-right-handed display” is performed to suggest in advance that a game ball is to be fired toward the right area 2AR of 2A.

  In the state shown in FIG. 115 (a), when two game balls have entered the first start port 6 in the left region 2AL, the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 80 is performed in steps S1700-1 → S1700-2. → S1700-10 → S1700-13 → S1700-14 → S1700-15 → S1700-16 → S1700-17 → S1700-18 → S1700-19 → (omitted) → RETURN The second right-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Thereby, the second right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the right-side area 2AR of the game area 2A to be sent. A “second right-handed notification” is performed to urge the player to launch a game ball. The “second right-handed notification” includes a process for outputting a right-handed voice request by the voice output device 15 in addition to a process for displaying the second right-handed image KMG2 on the image display device 14. May be. Through such processing, an effect image 1911 shown in FIG. 115B is displayed on the image display device 14.

In the effect image 1911 shown in FIG. 115 (b), in addition to the first right-handed image KMG1, the second right-handed image KMG2 is displayed at the center of the display unit 140 as a specific notification image for informing the right-handed. The The second right-handed image KMG2 is displayed by including a plurality of right-pointing arrows KMG2b and a character image KMG2c of “Caution!
Here, in accordance with the display timing of the character image KMG2c “CAUTION! Please make a right stroke”, the voice output device 15 may make a voice announcement “Make a right stroke”.

  Note that the second right-handed image KMG2 is erased from display on the display unit 140 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display.

  Specifically, in the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 80, the flow is step S1700-1 → S1700-6 → S1700-7 → S1700-8 → (omitted) → RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a performs step S1700-7. The second right-handed display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  As a result, the second right-handed display end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 generate a “second right-handed notification”. Is terminated.

  If the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a customer waiting state designation command in the high-probability short-time gaming state, the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 80 is performed from step S1700-1 to S1700-2. → S1700-10 → S1700-13 → S1700-14 → S1700-15 → S1700-16 → S1700-21 → S1700-22 → S1700-19 → (omitted) → RETURN The flow goes to step S1700-21. The third right-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, the third right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the right control area 104 to enter the right area 2AR of the game area 2A. A “third right-handed notification” is made to urge the player to launch a game ball. The “third right-handed notification” includes a process for outputting a right-handed voice request by the voice output device 15 in addition to a process for displaying the third right-handed image KMG3 on the image display device 14. May be.

  Through this process, although not shown in the figure, the image display device 14 is right-righted at the center of the display unit 140 in the same display manner as the second right-handed image KMG2 shown in FIG. As the specific notification image to be notified, the third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed large.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a display example of a right-handed display when a game ball enters the first starting port 6 in the high-probability short-time game state. Even in the gaming state, as shown in FIG. 115, “first right-handed notification”, “second right-handed notification”, and “third right-handed notification” are displayed in the same manner. Good.

(Left-handed display when changing from probabilistic gaming state to normal gaming state)
FIG. 116 shows that after a probability change gaming state in which a game progresses by launching a game ball toward the right region 2AR of the game region 2A, the game state is fired toward the left region 2AL of the game region 2A. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the left-handed display for encouraging a player to emit a game ball toward the left side area 2AL when it changes to the normal game state where a game progresses by doing.

  Here, in the present embodiment, priority on display is provided in relation to the production symbols TZ1 to TZ4 already displayed on the image display device 14 based on the importance and urgency of the “left-handed” display. The “left-handed” display is preferentially superimposed on other display contents and will be described below.

  In the effect image 1001 of the last variation display of the effect symbol in the probability variation gaming state, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the remaining 0 characters are displayed in the probability variation remaining number image KKG which is the display mode for probability variation. Thereafter, when the variable display is finished, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), the three effect symbols TZ 1 to TZ 3 are stopped and displayed side by side in the center of the display unit 140, and the effect on the lower right side of the display unit 140. Three special effect symbols TZ4 are stopped and displayed side by side between the symbol TZ3 and the second reserved icon display area 143.

When the game state is changed from this state to the normal game state, the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 81 is a flow of steps S1800-1, S1800-2, S1800-3, S1800-4, S1800-5, and RETURN. In step S1800-3, the sub CPU 102a sets the first left-handed display start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. As a result, the first left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the left-side area 2AL of the game area 2A. A “first left-handed notification” is made to urge the player to launch a game ball. With this “first left-hand notification,” an effect image 1011 shown in FIG. 116C is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, the “first left-handed notification” includes processing for causing the sound output device 15 to output a sound for urging left-handed in addition to displaying the first left-handed image 1612 on the image display device 14. May be.

  In the effect image 1011, the first left-handed image 1612 included in the above-mentioned “first left-handed notification” is displayed below the display unit 140 so as to be superimposed on the effect image in the effect pattern variation in the normal gaming state. The first left-handed image 1612 includes a horizontally long first window 1613 and a second window 1614. The first window 1613 includes a plurality of leftward arrows 1615, and the second window 1614 includes a “left-handed” image. Return to “” is included. Here, the priority order of image display is hold display> first left-handed image 1612, and the hold display is displayed on the first left-handed image 1612.

  In the effect image 1011, the first left-handed image 1612 extends in the horizontal direction of the image display device 14 and is displayed superimposed on the hold display, but “please return to left-handed”. The character image 1616 is arranged so as not to be superimposed on the hold display.

(Left-handed display while waiting for customers)
FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a display example when the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 in the right area 2AR during the customer waiting state in the normal gaming state.

  In a state where the game ball is not passing the winning gate 10 in the right area 2AR during the customer waiting state, the customer waiting state image 1101 shown in FIG. 117 (a) is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. State is maintained.

  In the customer waiting state image 1101, the effect symbols (first effect symbols) “1”, “4”, and “9” of the three first display modes indicating the loss as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed. As the symbol TZ4, the effect symbols (third effect symbols) “1”, “4”, and “9” in three third display modes corresponding to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed. In the first hold icon display area 141 and the changing icon display area 142, no icon is displayed. In the upper left part of the display unit 140, an image showing a normal performance mode A indicating that the gaming state is disadvantageous for the player set corresponding to the normal gaming state that is a low-probability gaming state and a non-temporary gaming state. AMG is displayed.

When the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 in the right area 2AR from this state, the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 81 is performed in steps S1800-1 → S1800-2 → S1800-9 → S1800-12 → S1800-13 → S1800. In the flow of −14 → S1800-15 → S1800-5 → RETURN, the sub CPU 102a sets a second left-handed display start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in step S1800-14. As a result, the second left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the left-side area 2AL of the game area 2A. A “second left-handed notification” is performed to urge the player to launch a game ball. With this “second left-handed notification”, the image display device 14 displays the customer waiting state image 1111 shown in FIG. 117 (b).
Here, the “second left-handed notification” includes processing for causing the audio display device 15 to output a sound for urging left-handed in addition to displaying the second left-handed image 1622 on the image display device 14. May be.

  In the customer waiting state image 1111 shown in FIG. 117 (b), the above-mentioned “second left-handed notification” is displayed on the lower part of the display unit 140 so as to overlap the customer waiting state image 1101 shown in FIG. 117 (a). The included second left-handed image 1622 is displayed. The second left-handed image 1622 includes a horizontally long first window 1623 and a second window 1624. The first window 1623 includes a plurality of leftward arrows 1625. Return to “” character image 1626 is included.

  In the customer waiting state image 1111, the second left-handed image 1622 extends in the horizontal direction of the image display device 14 and is displayed superimposed on the hold display. The “Please” character image 1626 is arranged so as not to be superimposed on the hold display.

(Left-handed display while changing the stage design in the normal gaming state)
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a display example when the game ball passes the winning gate 10 in the right area 2AR during the change of the effect symbol in the normal gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (a), in the effect image 1201 in which the effect symbol is changing in the normal gaming state, the changing icon A01 is displayed in the changing icon display area 142, and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are changed and displayed. Accordingly, the special effect symbol TZ4 is also displayed in a variable manner. In the lower center portion of the display unit 140, an image 1701 of a notice effect by a mini character is displayed. An image AMG showing the normal effect mode A is displayed on the upper left portion of the display unit 140.

When the game ball passes the winning gate 10 from the state where the effect symbol variation in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 118A is performed, in the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 81, step S1800-1 → step S1800-2 → Step S1800-9 → Step S1800-12 → Step S1800-13 → Step S1800-16 → Step S1800-17 → Step S1800-5 → RETURN The flow is as follows. A third left-handed display start command is set in the buffer. Thereby, the third left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A to be sent. A “third left-handed notification” is performed to urge the player to launch a game ball. With this “third left-handed notification”, the effect image 1211 shown in FIG. 118B is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, the “third left-handed notification” includes a process for causing the audio output device 15 to output a sound for urging left-handed in addition to displaying the third left-handed image 1632 on the image display device 14. May be.

  In the effect image 1211, the third image included in the “third left-handed notification” described above is superimposed on the effect image 1201 during the effect symbol variation in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. A left-handed image 1632 is displayed. The third left-handed image 1632 includes a horizontally long first window 1633 and a second window 1634. The first window 1633 includes a plurality of left-pointing arrows 1635, and the second window 1634 contains a “left-handed” image. Return to “” character image 1636 is included. Here, the priority order of the image display is hold display> third left-handed image 1632> notice effect image 1701. The third left-handed image 1632 is displayed on the notice effect image 1701, and the third A hold display is displayed on the left-handed image 1632.

  In the effect image 1211, the third left-handed image 1632 extends in the horizontal direction of the image display device 14 and is superimposed on the hold display, but “please return to left-handed”. The character image 1636 is arranged so as not to be superimposed on the hold display.

(Left-handed display during menu display while waiting for customers)
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a display example when the game ball passes the winning gate 10 in the right area 2AR during the menu display in the customer waiting state.

  First, when an operation is performed on the effect button 18A in the customer waiting state in which the menu is not displayed, the customer waiting display control process of FIG. 79 is performed in steps S1400-1 → S1400-5 → S1400-6 → S1400-7. → S1400-8 → S1400-9 → RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a displays a menu image that allows menu operations to be superimposed on the screen such as the waiting-for-customer image 1101 shown in FIG. 117 (a). Perform the process. Thereby, the menu display image 1501 shown in FIG. 119 (a) is displayed so as to be superimposed.

  In the menu display image 1501, a character image 1502 “Please select a menu with the cross key” is displayed at the top of the display unit 140, and each of the images 1503, 1504, 1505, 1506 of the selection items is displayed on the left side of the display unit 140. 1507, a character image 1508 on the right side of the display unit 140, an image 1509 showing a selection button device at the bottom of the display unit 140, a character image 1510 of “select”, an image 1511 showing an effect button device, and a character of “setting” An image 1512 is displayed.

Here, the function of each of the images 1503, 1504, 1505, 1506, and 1507 of the selection items shown as an example of the menu display in FIG. 119 will be described.
The selection item image 1503 is an item in which a game history is recorded by a QR code reading operation in conjunction with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone as displayed as “Pachi log”. The selection item image 1504 is an item for performing, for example, changing the BGM flowing during the normal gaming state, changing the background image of the liquid crystal screen, and the like as “actual machine customization” is displayed. The selection item image 1505 is displayed on the image display device 14 during a game such as a specific gaming state (short-time gaming state, probability-changing gaming state) or a jackpot gaming state, for example, as “Character selection” is displayed. This is an item for selecting a main character to be selected. The selection item image 1506 is an item for explaining the game machine operation for beginners of the game machine operation as displayed as “Pachinko course”. As the selection item image 1507 is displayed as “return”, the menu display can be terminated by selecting the image 1507.

When the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 in the right area 2AR from the menu display shown in FIG. 119 (a), the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 81 is performed in steps S1800-1 → S1800-2. → S1800-9 → S1800-12 → S1800-13 → S1800-14 → S1800-15 → S1800-5 → RETURN Set the display start command. As a result, the second left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the left-side area 2AL of the game area 2A. A “second left-handed notification” is performed to urge the player to launch a game ball. By this “second left-handed notification”, the menu display image 1520 shown in FIG. 119 (b) is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, the “second left-handed notification” includes processing for causing the sound output device 15 to output a sound for urging left-handed in addition to displaying the second left-handed image 1652 on the image display device 14. May be.

  In the menu display image 1520, the second left-handed image 1652 included in the “second left-handed notification” described above is displayed below the display unit 140 so as to overlap the menu display image 1501 shown in FIG. The The second left-handed image 1652 includes a horizontally long first window 1653 and a second window 1654. The first window 1653 includes a plurality of leftward arrows 1655, and the second window 1654 includes a “left-handed” image. Return to “” character image 1656 is included. Here, the priority of image display is second left-handed image 1652> image 1509 to image 1512, and second left-handed image 1652 is displayed on images 1509 to 1512.

(First modification of the first embodiment)
FIG. 120 is a diagram showing left-handed display in the first modification example of the first embodiment.
FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a display example when the game ball passes the winning gate 10 during the change of the effect symbol in the normal game state, as in FIG. 118.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the effect image 1301 in which the effect symbol changes in the normal game state, the notice effect image 1701 by the mini character is displayed at a position on the upper right side of the display unit 140, and the special effect symbol TZ4 is displayed. Except for being displayed on the upper left side of the section 140, other display contents are the same as the effect image 1201 shown in FIG. 118 (a).

  When the game ball passes through the winning gate 10 from this state, a third left-handed display command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 are transmitted. Thus, “third left-handed notification” is performed to urge the player to launch a game ball toward the left region 2AL of the game region 2A. By this “third left-handed notification”, processing for displaying the third left-handed image 1642 is performed, and the effect image 1311 shown in FIG. 120B is displayed on the image display device 14.

  In the effect image 1311, a third left-hand image 1642 is displayed on the upper part of the display unit 140 so as to overlap the effect image 1301 in the effect symbol variation in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 120 (a). The third left-handed image 1642 includes a horizontally long first window 1643 and a second window 1644. The first window 1643 includes a plurality of leftward arrows 1645, and the second window 1644 includes “left-handed” Return to “” is included. Here, the priority order of the image display is special effect design TZ4> third left-handed image 1642> notice effect image 1701. The third left-handed image 1642 is displayed on the notice effect image 1701; A special effect symbol TZ4 is displayed on the third left-handed image 1642.

  In the effect image 1311, the third left-handed image 1642 extends in the horizontal direction of the image display device 14 and is displayed superimposed on the special effect symbol TZ4. The character image 1646 of “” is arranged so as not to be superimposed on the special effect design TZ4.

(Second modification of the first embodiment)
FIG. 121 is a diagram showing left-handed display in the second modification example of the first embodiment.
The effect image 1411 shown in FIG. 121 is an example in which the third left-handed image 1812 included in the “third left-handed notification” is displayed when the game ball passes the winning gate 10 during the change of the effect symbol in the normal gaming state. Is shown.

  In the effect image 1411, the third left-hand image 1812 is displayed so as to overlap the area where the effect symbol TZ 1 on the left side of the image display device 14 is displayed. The third left-handed image 1812 is a display mode in which a vertically long window 1813 includes a leftward arrow 1814 and a character image 1815 of “Return to left-handed”.

  Here, in the second modified example of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121, the priority order of image display is the third left-handed image 1812> effect design TZ1, and the third left-handed image 1812 has an effect design. The display is preferentially overlaid on the area where TZ1 is displayed. However, the priority order of the third left-handed image 1812 with respect to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 is set to be high, and the display is not limited to the method of displaying the effect symbols TZ1 superimposed on the effect symbols TZ1 but superimposed on the other effect symbols TZ2 to TZ4. Furthermore, the size of the third left-handed image 1812 is greatly enlarged, such as being superimposed on a plurality of effect symbols TZ1 and effect symbols TZ2, and the plurality of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 are hidden. You may superimpose and display.

  That is, in the second modification of the first embodiment, the third left-handed image 1812 is not overlapped and covered with all the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4, and at least of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4. The third left-handed image 1812 is preferentially displayed with respect to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 so as not to hide one effect symbol.

  As described above, in the first modification example and the second modification example of the first embodiment, the “left-handed” display is in the order of priority regarding display in relation to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 and the like already displayed on the image display device 14. Since the player can easily recognize the “left-handed” display even if the player is paying attention to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 and the image of the notice effect by the mini character, it is easy for the player It is possible to suppress the launch of a game ball to a disadvantaged game area.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, while the “left-handed” display is being performed on the image display device 14, a more effective presentation is preferentially shown to the player. The “left-handed” display may be hidden for an effect using a light guide plate (not shown) with a high priority and an effect using the effect accessory device 17.

  For warning notifications that need to be taken urgently, such as “ball removal notification” and “magnet error” that should be urgently notified to the player during the game, “left-handed” display on the image display device 14 Simultaneous display may be possible so as not to hide the “left-handed” display without overlapping.

(Second Embodiment)
The second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

  In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 80, in a state where a game ball is to be launched toward the right region 2AR of the game region 2A (during a big hit game or during a short time), The second right-handed image KMG2 displayed on the image display device 14 is supposed to end display on condition that a predetermined display time (second right-handed display time) has elapsed.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the game ball passes the winning gate 10 while the second right-handed image KMG2 displayed on the image display device 14 is displayed, or the fourth general The display of the second right-handed image KMG2 is terminated on condition that the winning entry is entered, and will be described below.

◇ (Right-handed display control process 2 in the second embodiment)
A right-handed display control process by the effect control board 102 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, step S1701-1 to step S1701-5 and step S1701-8 are the same as the processing in step S1700-1 to step S1700-5 and step S1700-9 in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted. To do.

  In step S1701-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a winning gate passage designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10, the process proceeds to step S1701-9. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has not passed through the winning gate 10, the process proceeds to step S1701-7.

  In step S1701-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the fourth general winning opening 11-4. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a fourth general winning entry entrance designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that a game ball has entered the fourth general prize opening 11-4, the process proceeds to step S1701-9, and determines that no game ball has entered the fourth general prize opening 11-4. Then, the process proceeds to step S1701-8.

  In step S1701-9, the sub CPU 102a instructs to end “second right-handed notification” including display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or “third right-handed notification” including display of the third right-handed image KMG3. Therefore, the second right-handed display end command or the third right-handed display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the process proceeds to step S1701-10. The second right-handed display end command or the third right-handed display end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output processing in step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the “first The “2 right-handed notification” or “third right-handed notification” is ended.

  In step S1701-10, the sub CPU 102a selects the second right handed display flag “02R” in the second right handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c or the third right handed display flag “03R” in the third right handed display flag storage area. Is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1701-2.

  Since steps S1701-1 to S1701-23, which are subsequent processes, are the same as the processes in steps S1700-10 to S1700-22 in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, the “second right-handed notification” or the “third right-handed notification” is detected until the passing of the game ball at the winning gate 10 or the entering of the fourth general winning opening is detected. Is maintained, the effectiveness of display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 can be enhanced.

  In the second embodiment, when the passing of one game ball at the winning gate 10 or the entry of one game ball into the fourth general winning opening is detected, the second right Although the display of the hit image KMG2 or the third right strike image KMG3 is to be terminated, the passage of a predetermined number of game balls is detected at the winning gate 10, or the predetermined number of game balls at the fourth general winning opening. The display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 may be terminated on the condition that an incoming ball has been detected.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is terminated when passing through the winning gate 10 or entering the fourth general winning opening is detected. However, the display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 may be terminated when a ball entering the second start port 7 is detected.

(Third embodiment)
The third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 81, in the state where the game ball is to be launched toward the left region 2AL of the game region 2A (during the normal game state), the image display device 14 is temporarily set. The displayed first left-handed image 1612, second left-handed image 1622, and third left-handed image 1632 are supposed to be terminated on condition that a predetermined display time (left-handed display time) has elapsed. .
On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a game ball is displayed while the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 displayed on the image display device 14 are displayed. Is terminated on condition that the ball enters the first starting port 6 or enters the first to third general winning ports, which will be described below.

(Left-handed display control process 2 in the third embodiment)
The left-handed display control process by the effect control board 102 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, step S1801-1 to step S1801-4 are the same as the processing of step S1800-1 to step S1800-4 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. In the third embodiment, there is no need to set the display time of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632. Therefore, in step S1800-5 in the first embodiment, The corresponding processing is not performed.

  In step S1801-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the first start opening winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that a game ball has entered the first start port 6, the process proceeds to step S1801-7, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that no game ball has entered the first start port 6, step S1801- The process is moved to 6.

  In step S1801-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the first general winning opening 11-1, the second general winning opening 11-2, and the third general winning opening 11-3. judge. Specifically, the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a first general winning entry entrance designation command, a second general winning entry entry designation command, or a third general winning entry entry designation command. It is determined whether or not there is. If the sub CPU 102a determines that a game ball has entered one of the first general winning opening 11-1, the second general winning opening 11-2, and the third general winning opening 11-3, the process proceeds to step S1801-7. If it is determined that no game ball has entered any of the first general winning opening 11-1, the second general winning opening 11-2, and the third general winning opening 11-3, this left-handed display control process Exit.

  In step S1801-7, when the first left-handed display flag “01L” in the first left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c is set, the sub CPU 102a issues a first left-handed display end command, When the second left-handed display flag “02L” in the left-handed display flag storage area is set, the second left-handed display end command is sent to the third left-handed display flag “03L” in the third left-handed display flag storage area. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, the process proceeds to step S1801-8.

  In step S1801-8, the sub CPU 102a terminates the display of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632, and stores the first left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The first left-handed display flag “01L”, the second left-handed display flag “02L” in the second left-handed display flag storage area, and the third left-handed display flag “03L” in the third left-handed display flag storage area are cleared. .

  Note that steps S1801-9 to S1801-17 are the same as the processes in steps S1800-9 to S1800-17 in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, the first left-handed image 1612 until the entry of the game ball into the first start port 6 or the entry into the first to third general winning ports is detected. Since the display of the second left-handed image 1622 and the third left-handed image 1632 is maintained, the effectiveness of these displays can be enhanced.

(Fourth embodiment)
Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

  In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 81, in the state where the game ball is to be fired toward the left region 2AL of the game region 2A (normal game state), one winning ball in the winning gate 10 When it is detected that the game ball has passed, “second left notification” or “third left notification” is performed.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when it is detected that three game balls have passed through the winning gate 10 in the same game state (normal game state), Notification "or" third left-handed notification "is performed, and thereafter, every time a game ball for one ball passes at the winning gate 10 unless a ball entering the first starting port 6 is detected, The “2 left-handed notification” or “third left-handed notification” is performed, which will be described below.

(Left-handed display control process 3 in the fourth embodiment)
The left-handed display control processing by the effect control board 102 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, step S1802-1 to step S1802-5 are the same as the processing of step S1800-1 to step S1800-5 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In step S1802-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a winning gate passage designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10, the process proceeds to step S1802-7. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has not passed through the winning gate 10, the process proceeds to step S1802-12.

  In step S1802-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not three game balls have already passed in the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning gate 3 ball passing flag “03G” is set in the winning gate 3 ball passing flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the winning gate three-ball passing flag has been set, it moves the process to step S1802-15. If it determines that the winning gate three-ball passing flag has not been set, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1802-8.

  In step S1802-8, the sub CPU 102a updates the counter value of the winning gate passage number counter S by adding “1”, and proceeds to step S1802-9.

  In step S1802-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the counter value of the winning gate passage number counter S is 3 or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value is not 3 or more, it ends the left-handed display control process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the winning gate passage number counter S is 3 or more, the sub CPU 102a performs the process in step S1802-10. Move.

  In step S1802-10, the sub CPU 102a sets a winning gate three-ball passing flag “03G” in the winning gate three-ball passing flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1802-11, the sub CPU 102a clears the counter value of the winning gate passage number counter S, and moves the process to step S1802-15.

  In step S1802-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the first start opening winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that a game ball has entered the first start port 6, the process proceeds to step S1802-13. If the sub CPU 102a determines that no game ball has entered the first start port 6, The display control process ends.

  In step S1802-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not three game balls have already passed in the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning gate 3 ball passing flag “03G” is set in the winning gate 3 ball passing flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the winning gate three-ball passing flag has been set, it moves the process to step S1802-14. If it determines that the winning gate three-ball passing flag has not been set, the sub-CPU 102a ends the left-handed display control process. .

  In step S1802-14, the sub CPU 102a clears the winning gate three-ball passing flag “03G” stored in the winning gate three-ball passing storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the left-handed display control process.

  In step S1802-15, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the customer is currently waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the customer waiting state, it moves the process to step S1802-16, and if it determines that it is not in the customer waiting state, it moves the process to step S1802-18.

  In step S1802-16, the sub CPU 102a sets a second left-handed display start command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c in order to instruct the start of display of the second left-handed image 1622, and the process proceeds to step S1802-17. . The second left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the second left-handed image 1622 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The “second left-handed notification” is executed.

  In step S1802-17, the sub CPU 102a sets the second left-handed display flag “02L” in the second left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1802-5.

  In step S1802-18, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the big hit game, the high-probability short-time gaming state, or the low-probability short-time gaming state is currently in progress. Specifically, whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a round designation command, and the effect mode flag is stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. It is determined whether “01H” to “04H” are set. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not a jackpot game or time saving, that is, if it is determined that the symbol is changing in the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S1802-19. The left-handed display control process is terminated.

  In step S1802-19, the sub CPU 102a sets a third left-handed display start command for instructing the start of display of the third left-handed image 1632 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1802-20. . The third left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the third left-handed image 1632 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The “third left-hand notification” is executed.

  In step S1802-20, the sub CPU 102a sets the third left-handed display flag “03L” in the third left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1802-5.

  Hereinafter, steps S1802-21 to S1802-23 are the same as the processing of steps S1800-6 to S1800-8 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the relationship between the passing of the game ball to the winning gate 10 and the control related to the left-handed display in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125.

In the game state (normal game state) in which game balls are launched toward the left region 2AL of the game region 2A, when three game balls have passed the winning gate 10, the sub CPU 102a displays the left-handed display shown in FIG. In the control processing, processing is performed in the order of step S1802-6, step S1802-7, step S1802-8, step S1802-9, step S1802-10, and thereafter, steps S1802-15 to S1802-20 are performed. Based on the processing, the second left-handed display start command or the third left-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.
In step S1802-10, in order to store the fact that three game balls have passed through the winning gate 10, the winning gate three-ball passing flag “in the winning gate three-ball passing flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c” is stored. 03G "is set.

As a result, the second left-handed display start command or the third left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 A “second left-handed notification” or a “third left-handed notification” that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the left region 2AL of the game region 2A is performed. By this “second left-handed notification” or “third left-handed notification”, the second left-handed image 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, in the “second left-handed notification” and “third left-handed notification”, in addition to displaying the second left-handed image 1622 and the third left-handed image 1632 on the image display device 14, the audio output device 15. May include a process for outputting a sound prompting the user to strike left.

  In this state, when one game ball has passed the winning gate 10, in the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 124, the process is performed in the order of step S1802-6 → step S1802-7 → step S1802-15. The second left-handed display start command or the third left-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c based on the processing of steps S1802-15 to S1802-20.

For this reason, every time one game ball passes through the winning gate 10, the second left-handed display start command or the third left-handed display start command is generated in the data output processing in step S1900 and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board. The “second left-handed notification” or “third left-handed notification” is transmitted to 105 and urged to launch a game ball toward the left region 2AL of the game region 2A by the lamp control substrate 104 and the image control substrate 105. Done. By this “second left-handed notification” or “third left-handed notification”, the second left-handed image 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is displayed on the image display device 14.
Also in this case, in the “second left-handed notification” and “third left-handed notification”, in addition to displaying the second left-handed image 1622 and the third left-handed image 1632 on the image display device 14, an audio output The device 15 may include a process for outputting a sound prompting the user to strike left.

  In this state, when one game ball enters the first start port 6, the main CPU 101a sends the first start port winning designation command to the effect transmission data storage area (transmission) in the main RAM 101c in step S238. In step S700, a first start port winning designation command is transmitted to the sub CPU 102a.

  Then, in the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. 124, the process is performed in the order of step S1802-12 → step S1802-13 → step S1802-14, and thereafter, game balls for three balls pass through the winning gate 10. At that time, processing for “second left-handed notification” or “third left-handed notification” is performed.

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, when it is detected that a predetermined first number (for example, three balls) of game balls have passed through the winning gate 10, the second left-handed image 1622 or The third left-handed image 1632 is displayed, and thereafter, every time a second number (for example, one ball) of game balls less than the first number passes through the winning gate 10, the second left-handed image 1632 is displayed. 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is displayed.

  However, once a ball entering the first starting port 6 is detected, the winning gate three-ball passing flag “03G” is cleared in step S1802-14 of the left-handed display control process shown in FIG. Therefore, thereafter, unless the first number of game balls pass through the winning gate 10, the second left-handed image 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is not displayed.

  For this reason, in the fourth embodiment, even when one game ball that has been accidentally launched by the player toward the second game area passes through the winning gate 10, “left-handed” Since the display is not immediately performed, it is possible to avoid annoyance of the player due to the “left-handed” display on the image display device 14. Therefore, since the “left-handed” display is made only when the player has continuously fired a predetermined number of game balls toward the second game area, an effective “left Can be displayed. Then, in the state where the “left-handed” display is displayed, the game is completed because the “left-handed” display is ended only by detecting the entry of one game ball into the first starting port 6. Can continue playing without feeling stressed.

  In the fourth embodiment, after detecting that a predetermined first number (for example, three balls) of game balls have passed through the winning gate 10, a ball entering the first start port 6 is detected. Thus, although the winning gate three-ball passing flag “03G” is to be cleared, when a ball entering the first to third general winning ports 11-1, 11-2, 11-3 is detected, The winning gate three-ball passing flag “03G” may be cleared.

(Fifth embodiment)
The fifth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

  In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 80, a state in which a game ball is to be launched toward the right region 2AR of the game region 2A (a big hit game state, a high-probability short-time game state or a low-probability state). In the short-time gaming state), when it is detected that two game balls have entered at the first starting port 6, "second right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification" was to be performed. .

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, in the same gaming state (a big hit gaming state, a high-probability short-time gaming state or a low-probability short-time gaming state), three game balls are collected at the first start port 6. When it is detected that the vehicle has passed, “second right-handed notification” or “third right-handed notification” is to be performed. Thereafter, the first start port is detected unless passage of the game ball at the winning gate 10 is detected. In FIG. 6, every time one game ball passes, “second right-handed notification” or “third right-handed notification” is performed, which will be described below.

(Right-handed display control process 3 in the fifth embodiment)
The right-handed display control process by the effect control board 102 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, step S1702-1 to step S1702-10 are the same as the processing of step S1700-1 to step S1700-10 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In step S1702-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is the first start opening winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that a game ball has entered the first start port 6, the process proceeds to step S1702-12, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that no game ball has entered the first start port 6, step S1702-23. Move processing to.

  In step S <b> 1702-12, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not three game balls have already entered the first start port 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first start-out 3-ball entrance flag “03K” is set in the first start-up 3-ball entrance flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the first start port 3 ball entrance flag has been set, it moves the process to step S1702-16, and if it determines that the first start port 3 ball entrance flag has not been set, the step S1702 The processing is moved to 13.

  In step S1702-13, the sub CPU 102a adds “1” to the counter value of the first starting opening ball number counter N to update it, and moves the process to step S1702-14.

  In step S <b> 1702-14, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not the counter value of the first starting-port entrance ball number counter N is 3 or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value is not 3 or more, it ends the right-handed display control process. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the first starting entrance ball number counter N is 3 or more, step S1702-15 is performed. Move processing to.

  In step S <b> 1702-15, the sub CPU 102 a sets the first start port 3 ball entrance flag “03K” in the first start port 3 ball entrance flag storage area of the sub RAM 102 c.

  Here, step S1702-16 to step S1702-22 are the same as the processing of step S1700-16 to step S1700-20 and step S1700-11 to step S1700-12 in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted. To do.

  In step S1702-23, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a winning gate passage designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has passed at the winning gate 10, the process proceeds to step S1702-24. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has not passed at the winning gate 10, the left-handed display control process ends. .

  In step S <b> 1702-24, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not three game balls have already entered the first start port 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first start-out 3-ball entrance flag “03K” is set in the first start-up 3-ball entrance flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the first starting port 3 ball entering flag has been set, it moves to step S1702-25, and if it determines that the first starting port 3 ball entering flag has not been set, the left CPU The display control process ends.

  In step S <b> 1702-25, the sub CPU 102 a clears the first start port 3 ball entrance flag “03K” stored in the first start port 3 ball entrance flag storage area of the sub RAM 102 c, and performs left-handed display control. The process ends.

  Hereinafter, Steps S1702-26 to S1702-27 are the same as the processing of Steps S1700-21 to S1700-22 in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

From the above, in the fifth embodiment, in the game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right region 2AR of the game region 2A (big hit game state, high-probability short game state or low-probability short-game state), When the game balls for the balls have entered the first start port 6, the sub CPU 102a performs step S1702-11 → step S1702-12 → step S1702-13 → step S1702 in the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 14 → step S1702-15, and thereafter, based on the processing of steps S1702-16 to S1702-20, the second right-handed display start command or the third right is stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Set the command to start typing.
Further, in step S1702-15, in order to store the fact that three game balls have entered the first starting port 6, the first starting port three-ball entering flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c stores 1 start opening 3 ball entering flag “03K” is set.

Thereby, the second right-handed display start command or the third right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 A “second right-handed notification” or a “third right-handed notification” that prompts the player to fire a game ball toward the right region 2AR of the game region 2A is performed. With this “second right-handed notification” or “third right-handed notification”, the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, in the “second right-handed notification” and “third right-handed notification”, in addition to displaying the second right-handed image KMG2 and the third right-handed image KMG3 on the image display device 14, the audio output device 15 May include a process for outputting a sound prompting the user to strike left.

  In this state, when one game ball enters the first start port 6, in the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 126, the flow from step S1702-11 to step S1702-12 to step S1702-16 The second right-handed display start command or the third right-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c based on the processing in steps S1702-15 to S1702-20.

For this reason, every time one game ball enters the first start port 6, the second right-handed display start command or the third right-handed display start command is sent to the lamp control board 104 and the data output process in step S1900. “Second right-handed notification” or “third right-handed” which is transmitted to the image control board 105 and urges the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 to shoot a game ball toward the right area 2AR of the game area 2A. Notification "is performed. With this “second right-handed notification” or “third right-handed notification”, the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed on the image display device 14.
Also in this case, in the “second right-handed notification” and “third right-handed notification”, in addition to displaying the second right-handed image KMG2 and the third right-handed image KMG3 on the image display device 14, an audio output The device 15 may include a process for outputting a sound for prompting a right strike.

  In this state, when one game ball passes through the winning gate 10, the main CPU 101a sets a winning gate passage designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c in step S256. In step S700, a winning gate passage designation command is transmitted to the sub CPU 102a.

  In the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 126, the process is performed in the order of step S1702-23 → step S1702-24 → step S1702-25. At the time of entering the ball, processing for “second right-handed notification” or “third right-handed notification” is performed.

  In other words, in the fifth embodiment, when it is detected that a predetermined first number (for example, three balls) of game balls have entered the first start port 6, the second right The hit image KMG2 or the third right hit image KMG3 is displayed, and thereafter, a second number (for example, one ball) of game balls smaller than the first number is entered at the first start port 6. Each time the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed.

  However, once the passing of the game ball is detected at the winning gate 10, the first start opening three-ball entry flag “03K” is cleared in step S1702-25 of the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. Therefore, thereafter, the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is not displayed unless the first number of game balls enter the first start port 6.

  For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, even if a game ball for one ball that has been accidentally launched by the player toward the first game area is entered into the first start port 6, Since the “right-handed” display is not immediately performed, the troublesomeness of the player due to the “right-handed” display on the image display device 14 can be avoided. Therefore, since the “right-handed” display is made only when the player has fired a predetermined number of game balls continuously toward the first game area, an effective “right” in a more appropriate situation. Can be displayed. Then, in a state where the “right-handed” display is displayed, the passage of one game ball at the winning gate 10 is detected and the “right-handed” display is terminated. The game can be continued without feeling.

  In the fifth embodiment, after it is detected that a predetermined first number (for example, three balls) of game balls have been entered at the first starting port 6, the game balls pass through the winning gate 10. Although it is supposed to clear the first start port 3 ball entrance flag “03K” by the detection, when the game ball enters the 4th general winning port 11-4, the second start When the entrance of the game ball at the mouth 7 is detected, the first start-out 3 ball entrance flag “03K” may be cleared.

  In this embodiment, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set when the customer waiting state designation command is received and the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set at the end of the effect time of the customer waiting effect are the same time value ( For example, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set at the end of the effect time of the customer waiting effect may be shorter (for example, 10 seconds). Furthermore, when the state after the restoration of the power supply is the customer waiting state, the waiting time for the customer waiting effect is set to a shorter time value (for example, 0 seconds) so that the customer waiting effect is started earlier. Good.

  Further, as the customer waiting effect executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, for example, the above-described demonstration display, the model name display for displaying the model name of the gaming machine Y, and the manufacturer name (manufacturer name) of the gaming machine Y are used. Display of any two or more production displays, such as a manufacturer display to be displayed, and a warning display to display information for a player (for example, “prohibition of games under the age of 18”, “prohibition of snooping”, “prohibition of in-car notification of children”) A combination (unquestioned) may be used.

  In addition, in the case where a customer waiting effect is executed by a combination of demo display, model name display, and manufacturer display (in any order) in the image display device 14, a pseudo-accurate light emission effect is executed during the manufacturer display. During execution of display and model name display, the pseudo-accurate light emission effect may not be executed. In this way, the name of the manufacturer can be introduced gorgeously, and the manufacturer's image for the player can be improved.

  Further, in the case where a customer waiting effect is executed by a combination of demo display, model name display, and manufacturer display (in any order) in the image display device 14, a pseudo-accurate light emission effect is executed during the execution of the model name display, During execution of the demonstration display and the manufacturer display, the pseudo-accurate light emission effect may not be executed. In this way, the model name can be introduced gorgeously, and it is possible to improve the image of the gaming machine for the player.

  In addition, in the case where an effect of waiting for a customer is executed by a combination of manufacturer display, demo display, model name display, and alert display (in any order) in the image display device 14, a pseudo-accurate light emission effect is displayed during the model name display. On the other hand, during the execution of the manufacturer display, the demonstration display, and the alert display, the pseudo-accurate light emission effect may not be executed. In this way, the model name can be introduced gorgeously, and it is possible to improve the image of the gaming machine for the player.

  In addition, when the image display device 14 executes a waiting-for-waiting effect in any of three or more (in any order) of the manufacturer display, the demo display, the model name display, and the alert display, the execution of any two display effects is performed. While the pseudo-accurate light emission effect is executed, the pseudo-accurate light emission effect may not be executed while the remaining display effects are being executed.

  Further, a specific character displayed on the image display device 14 is displayed on the image display device 14 during the demonstration display during the execution of the variation effect based on the specific variation effect pattern or the execution of the accurate display effect. The pseudo-accurate light emission effect may be executed while the character is displayed.

  In addition, based on the operation of a predetermined changeover switch provided at a location where a player cannot operate but a game store clerk can operate, a normal mode that consumes normal power or an eco mode that consumes less power than the normal mode (customer The lamp / LED brightness can be switched to lower than the default brightness in the normal performance mode during the standby performance. In the normal mode, the pseudo-realistic light emission performance is executed during the customer standby performance, while the eco mode is set. During the waiting time, the pseudo-light emission effect may not be executed during the customer waiting effect.

  In this embodiment, the gaming machine Y generates a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state after the end of all jackpot games. However, when a jackpot game is generated by a stop display of a specific jackpot special symbol, the jackpot game ends. Later, a high probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state are generated until the next jackpot game, while when a normal jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed, the low-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state are maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 100 special games). It may be a gaming machine Y that is generated over the symbol display.

  In addition, when a game ball passes (wins) a specific area provided in the big winning opening 8 in specific rounds (for example, 8 rounds and 15 rounds) during the jackpot game, a high-probability gaming state and a short-time game after the jackpot game ends. While the state is generated for a predetermined period (for example, 120 special symbol variations), if the game ball does not pass through the specific area, the low-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state are set for a predetermined period after the jackpot game ends (for example, The gaming machine Y may be generated over 100 special symbol variations).

  ◆ By the way, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-228400), determination information as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is acquired and stored as a pending storage. When the start condition is established, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the hold memory, and the symbol variation display is executed. When the result of the variation display becomes a special result, the special game is executed. In a specific gaming state (time-short gaming state, probability variation gaming state) advantageous to the player over the gaming state, it is set so that the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal gaming state, and before the start condition is satisfied, the judgment information Although prior determination is performed and a continuous notice effect is performed in which a predetermined effect is performed over a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the prior determination, there is a concern that the interest of the game may be reduced.

  As a configuration for solving the above-described problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a game that can execute a variable display of symbols, and can execute a special game advantageous to the player when the variable display becomes a special result. In the machine, on-hold storage means for storing determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game as on-hold storage, determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the on-hold storage, and Based on the determination result of the determination means, the fluctuation display execution means for performing the fluctuation display, the prior determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game before the determination means, and the prior determination means Based on the determination result, control is made to continuous notice execution means for executing a continuous notice effect for performing a predetermined effect, a normal game state, and a specific game state in which the variation time of the variable display is likely to be shorter than the normal game state. To do Comprises a gaming state control means capable, for the continuous announcement execution unit is directed to performing the continuous announcement attraction in a high proportion towards said particular gaming state than the normal game state.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine such as the gaming machine Y, and can also be used for a jigball game machine and an arrangement ball gaming machine.

Y gaming machine 6 first start opening 6a first start opening detection sensor 7 second start opening 7a second start opening detection sensor 8 large winning opening 10 winning gate 14 image display device 15 audio output device 16 effect lighting device 70 second Start opening control device 80 Large winning opening control device 101 Main control board 101a Main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 Production control board 102a Sub CPU
102b Sub ROM
102c Sub RAM
140 Display unit 141 First hold icon display area 142 Fluctuating icon display area 143 Second hold icon display area

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention provides a special game determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player when a start condition is satisfied, and a first game in which a game ball can flow down. A first game area, a second game area, and an effect control means for displaying game information on the basis of the determination result when the game information can be notified and the determination is made by the special game determination means; The progress of the game is controlled based on the gaming state and the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the effect control means has a predetermined display condition in a waiting state for the customer where the game is not progressing. If satisfied, it is capable of executing a control to display the menu screen method is displayed for setting the Yu technique machine, upon termination of the second game state, a game ball to the first game region Specific to announce launch Being capable of performing knowledge, the display in the menu screen before Symbol plying state, when a predetermined execution condition is established, is capable of executing a first specific notification to execute the pre Kitoku constant notification, the plying When the predetermined execution condition is satisfied while the menu screen is not displayed in the state, the second specific notification for executing the specific notification can be executed. In the case of the first gaming state, the second gaming state In this case, at least a part of the effect design is the same, but the decorativeness is different .

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine having a first game area and a second game area where game balls can flow down, a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a notification means for reporting information,
The game control means includes
Controlling the progress of the game in accordance with the first gaming state and the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state;
The notification means includes
Menu screen display control means for performing control to display a menu screen on which a method for setting the gaming machine is displayed when a predetermined display condition is satisfied in the customer waiting state where the game is not progressing,
Specific notification control means for causing the notification means to execute a specific notification for notifying the launch of a game ball to the first game area when the second gaming state ends,
The specific notification control means causes the notification means to execute a specific notification for notifying the firing of the game ball to the first game area when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied while the menu screen is displayed in the waiting state for the customer. When the predetermined execution condition is satisfied while the menu screen is not displayed in the customer waiting state, the gaming machine causes the notification unit to execute the specific notification.